JP2021016506A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To allow a player to pay attention to a specific image by allowing the player to recognize that a specific image is a notice image.SOLUTION: A specific image (for example, a chance-up image) by a normal mode (for example, a white color), and a specific image by a special mode (for example, a blue color, a green color, a red color, and a rainbow color) for suggesting that a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is higher than the normal mode are displayable. A specific image is displayable by adding a first special performance element (for example, effect images of display colors of a blue color, a green color, a red color, and a rainbow color) when displaying a specific image by a special mode, and a specific image is displayable by adding a second special performance element (for example, effect images of display colors of a white color) differing from the first special performance element when displaying the specific image by the normal mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a winning ball, or a state advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, a specific image can be displayed during execution of a specific effect, and a specific image according to a normal mode and a special mode suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode are specified. Some are configured so that an image can be displayed and a specific image can be displayed by adding a special effect element when displaying a specific image in a special mode. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the first try effect (specific image according to a special aspect) is executed, the player is likely to display the try information (special effect element) and enter the specific game state. It is described that the try information is not displayed when the second try effect (specific image according to the normal mode), which is less likely to be in the specific game state than the first try effect, is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-136430 (paragraphs 0191, 0193, 0199, FIGS. 14, 15)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a specific image in a normal mode is displayed, the game is a notice image in which the mode changes according to the degree of expectation that the specific image is controlled in an advantageous state. It is difficult for a person to recognize, and it is not possible to draw the player's attention to a specific image.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to recognize that a specific image is a preview image and to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. In step 097IWS104 of the effect control CPU 120, a process table including superreach A to C is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are performed by the specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggested specific effect (for example, super reach A to C). An image display means (for example, a part to be executed) and an image display means (for example, a character image 097IW11, a character image 097IW21) capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. For example, in step 097IWS104 of the effect control CPU 120, a process table including super reach A to C and a chance-up effect is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), and the specific effect execution means is at least the first specific. A plurality of types of specific effects (for example, Super Reach A to C) including an effect (for example, Super Reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, Super Reach B) can be executed, and the image display means can be used as a specific image. At least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, image A4) can be displayed during the execution of the second specific effect. , Image B1, Image B2, Image B3) can be displayed, and a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (for example, suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode). For example, it is possible to display a specific image in blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-9 to 9). As shown in -16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means has a first special effect element (for example, blue, green, red) when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. , A rainbow-colored display color effect image) can be added to display a specific image, and a second special effect element (for example, white) that is different from the first special effect element when displaying a specific image in a normal manner is displayed. It is possible to display a specific image by adding an effect image of the display color (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16), and it is controlled to an advantageous state during the execution of the first specific effect. The first specific image can be displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) depending on the degree of expectation, and the first special effect element (for example, the display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image) can be displayed. The first specific image can be displayed by adding (effect images of blue, green, red, and rainbow display colors) (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16), and the movement of the player can be detected. Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold display area). Based on the detection result of 87AKB2, etc.), the promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display) that can execute the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player, and the detection means. An operation effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display) and a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a predetermined effect executing means that can execute a predetermined effect during execution of the variable display). The specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (for example, a display image using a display image 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4) and the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect processing step 87AKS049 during variable display. A specific display can be displayed by any one of 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 (display color, etc.), and the promotion effect executing means includes a plurality of effects including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of the modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3), and the predetermined effect execution means is the "extreme heat" using the predetermined mode (for example, the display image 87AKE3). !! !! The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including the message of the specific display, and the predetermined effect is determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display. A predetermined effect is executed depending on the mode (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 11-12), and a promotion effect is executed in a special mode at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 11-). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in 13), the promotion is controlled in an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, promotion according to the variable display result in FIG. 11-13). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the production). According to such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and the player can be focused on the specific image. In addition, the difference in the mode of the specific image can be emphasized by the display mode of the added first special effect element. In addition, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 2) In means 1, when the image display means can display an image of a common mode (for example, image X) as a first specific image and a second specific image, and displays an image of the common mode. It is possible to display the first specific image and the second specific image by adding a common first special effect element (for example, an effect image of a rainbow-colored display color) to the image (see FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2, a notification effect execution means (for example, effect) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, output of a notification sound) when a specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element. The control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes step 097IWS311), and the notification effect execution means does not execute the notification effect when a specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Does not shift to step 097IWS311 when it is Y in step 097IWS310). According to such a configuration, the player can be made aware of it only when the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to means 3, the image display means changes a specific image to which a second special effect element is added into a specific image to which a first special effect element is added (for example, a chance). It may be configured so that the up effects A7, B7, C5) can be executed (see FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6). According to such a configuration, the expectation can be maintained even when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to the means 4, the specific effect executing means includes the effect of the first period (for example, the effect of the first half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) and the first. The effect of the second period (for example, the effect of the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) including the effect of notifying whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state after the period (for example, notification of the result of success or failure) It is possible to execute the specific effect including, and the image display means can display the specific image during the first period, and restricts the display of the specific image during the second period (see FIG. 9-8). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be focused on whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state.

(Means 6) A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player in any of the means 1 to the means 5 (means 6). For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1), a predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a predetermined effect in any of a plurality of types of effect modes) as a pattern during variable display. A setting suggestion based on any of PT-1 to PT-7, or a portion capable of executing a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) is provided, and the effect mode of the predetermined effect is controlled to an advantageous state. A special mode that suggests that (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) and a specific mode that suggests the setting (for example, patterns PT-1 to PT that are specific patterns). When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the variable display of the symbol is started) including the setting suggestion based on any of -7. At the timing when a predetermined period elapses from (the timing before the variable display mode reaches the reach), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120). However, in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the reach notice, the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is executed in the 103SGS294. If the part to be decided with priority over the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296, the pattern is set in 103SGS301. A part that determines the execution of the reach notice (low) based on PT-8 in preference to the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4./The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice. (High)> Setting suggestion (High)> Reach notice (Low)> Setting suggestion (Low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (Modification 1) It may be configured as shown in FIG. 8-20)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate when the control is performed in an advantageous state.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the following gaming machines (means 7) to (means 14). Conventionally, in a game machine, when a player operates a button during an operation valid period as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-164504, if the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the mode of display or production. There was something to do. In such a game machine, the degree of expectation of a big hit only differs depending on the display and the mode of the production when the player operates it, and it is difficult to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by the production. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine that appropriately raises the player's expectation by directing and enhances the game entertainment.

(Means 7) Detection of a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display and that can detect the movement of the player. Means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKB1, second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.) ), The promotion effect execution means capable of executing the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display), and the operation based on the detection result of the detection means. An operation effect executing means that can execute an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect process during variable display) and a predetermined effect executing means that can execute a predetermined effect while the variable display is being executed (for example, a variable display). The specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (for example, display images 87AKC1 to red) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4) and includes an effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of the medium effect process. The specific display can be displayed by any one of the display colors corresponding to 87AKC4, and the promotion effect executing means includes a plurality of effect modes (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). For example, the promotion effect can be executed by any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display image 87AKF3), and the predetermined effect execution means is a predetermined mode (for example, "super heat !!" The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including the message of the specific display, and the predetermined effect is determined at a different ratio according to the display mode of the specific display. A predetermined effect is executed depending on the mode (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 11-12), and a promotion effect is executed at a different ratio according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 11-). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in 13), the promotion is controlled in an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, promotion according to the variable display result in FIG. 11-13). (See 87AK51, a decision example of production).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(Means 8) In the means 7, the predetermined effect may be executed by the predetermined effect executing means after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the operation effect is executed by the motion effect executing means (for example,). See FIG. 11-9 (B3)).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(Means 9) In the means 7 or the means 8, the display mode of the specific display can be changed in response to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, at the time of the second timing cut-in effect in FIG. 11-9 (B3)). It may be possible.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(Means 10) Any of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 in any of the means 7 to 9 depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed (for example, in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41). It may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different rates (such as when it is determined).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(Means 11) In any of the means 7 to the means 10, the display mode of the specific display is a specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, a change pattern determination example). When the first timing is determined in the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in 87AK22), it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(Means 12) A setting means (for example, step S6A in FIG. 10-6) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player in any of the means 7 to the means 11. The specific display may be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(Means 13) A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player in any of the means 7 to the means 12 (for example, step S6A in FIG. 10-6). The predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change process.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(Means 14) A setting means (for example, step S6A in FIG. 10-6) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player in any of the means 7 to the means 13. The promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means (for example, the promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-16). Determining example of production 87AK61 etc.).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when the effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of the variable display effect as in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is set when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) is the figure showing the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the fluctuation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion of. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 which are common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the variation pattern is normal reach / super reach. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, (C) shows the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach, and the third in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in 3 periods. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the chance up effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image and the success / failure result notification during the execution of the super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination example. It is a figure which shows the active display example and suggestion effect example. It is a figure which shows the cut-in effect example and the promotion effect example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the final display image. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the change pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the change pattern. It is a figure which shows the decision example about the suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the cut-in effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on the feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on the feature part 88AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on the feature part 89AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which becomes a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Includes processing to make settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 103SG of the Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 103SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and a player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 103SG003 and glass. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is the left game area 103SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 103SG002L, and in the right game area 103SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 103SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 103SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an opening sensor 103SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 103SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the board case 103SG201, a display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 103SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 103SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 103SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a probability change lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the probability change state, and a time reduction lamp 103SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is variably displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 103SG, the light is turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 103SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 103SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321 and the second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. The origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 103SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 103SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the big hit expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot game state when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state. After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), as the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 180 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for low-base medium total pending storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and the range is 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

In this way, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. When each variation pattern is assigned, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common determination ratio regardless of the set setting value, so that the super reach variation pattern is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the miss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the variation pattern is determined at a different ratio for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display unit 103SG029A, a second display unit 103SG029B, a third display unit 103SG029C, and a fourth display unit 103SG029D. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 103SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and “L.” is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “bL.” Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by controlling the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, the necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 103SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (103SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is determined (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set to proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010), and when the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), 103SGSa010 is not executed and 103SGSa010 is set. move on.

In 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (103SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (103SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off.

When the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N) in 103SGSa011, the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the process of 103SGSa013a-103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not to execute the RAM clear process (103SGSa009)) ( 103SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 103SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGsa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) Proceed to 103SGsa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017-103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress you are wearing.

In 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (103SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the lock switch 103SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (103SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processing of 103SGSa009-103SGSa016 is executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGsa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGsa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (103SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (103SGsa026; N), the processes of 103SGsa025 and 103SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (103SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029. Ends blinking (103SGsa027) and proceeds to 103SGsa028.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (103SGSa029) and allow interrupts (103SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGsa033 and 103SGsa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value error error occurs. The first display unit 103SG029A, the second display unit 103SG029B, the third display unit 103SG029C, and the fourth display unit 103SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 103SG029, are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of the above or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the above (103SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGsa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 103SGsa032-103SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-13, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 103SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clearing process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 103SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

8-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the receiving command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning are stored in one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that are aligned with the symbols. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the 4th variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display)
As the effect during the variable display, the effect suggests the advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the game is controlled to the big hit game state, and the setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process. It is a production (predetermined production) that can be any of the above. In the feature unit 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) suggesting that the variable display mode may become a reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. is there. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 the set value is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect when the effect result can be either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, that is, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach notice in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, the variable display effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display effect. When the execution is decided, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used. It is decided by lottery whether to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to 8-18 (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area. By fading out to the right side of the display area, the variable display effect ends. In addition, an image Z2 showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side may be displayed, and a set value is set depending on the number of the dropped paragliders. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body is destroyed and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and fall.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-19 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same, and each pattern PT-1 to 1 to 8 is destroyed. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number may be used). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is the pattern PT-. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. ..

Which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the effect period of such a variable display effect, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions, the effect of the common mode (for example, the effect of the aspect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Is executed, and a non-common mode of effect (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is an image display device) that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result. It is composed of a non-common effect period in which the effect) of moving downward in the display area of 5 is executed.

In the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effect during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than usual. The small symbol may be variably displayed at a predetermined place. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect or the like different from the variable display effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. Regarding the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are set as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion suggesting which of the 6 to 6 is set, and the number of paragliders destroyed is eight. It is said to be a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach notice that suggests the possibility of reaching. That is, the effect during variable display has the same effect mode in the common effect period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (number of paragliders destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (For example, 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT-5. 6 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6). ..

The patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting) can be obtained. It is regarded as the first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with low expectation that it is, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the set value is any of 5 and 6. In some cases, it is determined at a high rate, so that it is a second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} with a high degree of expectation that the set values are 5 and 6.

In the feature unit 103SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high. However, the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 to the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 to the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 to the high setting.

On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding the pattern PT-8, the variable display mode of the symbol is determined at a high rate when the normal reach is achieved, so that the expectation of becoming a super reach is low. The first special pattern {reach notice (low), first As for the pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach, which is highly expected to become super reach, is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach}. Notice (high), second special mode}.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-) that suggests the setting. It is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of a special mode). When any of the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of alignment than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 becomes a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined because the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is out of order. , Super reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation of jackpot than pattern PT-8.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, a mode suggesting the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set depending on the number of paragliders destroyed has been illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. It is not limited, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders may suggest a big hit or a high setting. Further, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which setting value is set, the effect mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of characters appearing, the type of character appearing, and the like. It may be something that can suggest a big hit or a set value.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or emitting a game effect lamp 9 or the like when the player falls, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (off, non-probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, the random numbers for determining the reach notice type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A) is used to determine whether or not the reach notice is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice when the method is used (103SGS292).

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 is assigned to pattern PT-8. A number of judgment values are assigned, and 60 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than in cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than a normal reach variation pattern. It is likely to be a reach variation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is considered as a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is considered to be a reach notice (high) pattern with high expectation for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing a lottery for the execution of the reach notice and the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low). } Is won, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS295). Next, the random numbers for determining the setting suggestion type are extracted, and the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the set value specified in 103SGS295 is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17 (B), when the set value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Judgment values are assigned, pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, and patterns. Four determination values are assigned to the PT-5, one determination value is assigned to the pattern PT-6, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to the pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 judgment values. Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, it is easy to win, and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are easily won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easier to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, it is confirmed that the set value is 6 when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if an effect based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. If the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more bodies is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 5 and 6. That is, the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered to be setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to be set high (set value 5 or 6), and the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to high (set value 5 or 6). It is said that the setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

In the first embodiment, the reach advance notice type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number and the like should be appropriately determined. Just do it. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 performed a lottery on whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, and as a result, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was obtained. It is determined whether or not the player has won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if the non-execution of the reach notice is won in 103SGS293, the winning pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting is uniquely determined and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the above is determined in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , 103SGS297 determines whether or not pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293 based on non-execution of setting suggestion or winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in the 103SGS300, and if the non-execution of the setting suggestion is won in the 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed. Is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 is Execution is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in the 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, it is determined whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. If the determination (103SGS302) is made and any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, the execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Further, when none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, when the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without deciding the execution of the effect. The production determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. The variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process ends.

Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, that is, the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. It is determined whether or not the execution of the variable display effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined in the process.

If the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, and the period until the variable display effect start is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer (103SGS279), and the variable display effect execution is executed. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the effect execution decision flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display effect, in this feature unit 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is set as the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started based on the above, an example is shown in which the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect (not shown) showing a precursor is performed before the timing at which the variable display effect is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start wait timer.

In the 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the predetermined variable display mode is determined after the variable display is started and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the effect timing, either reach notice or setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect, and when deciding whether or not to execute the variable display effect, the effect result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (the effect of the special aspect) with priority over the setting suggestion (the effect of the specific aspect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display of FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type of lottery. Give priority to.

That is, in the reach notice lottery, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294). The notice (high) will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Even if the lottery for setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is executed in 103SGS297 (high). ) Is not won, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

Further, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) suggesting that the ratio of being controlled by a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the reach notice (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is set to pattern PT-. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting suggestion (high) in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the effect during the variable display from being lowered due to the excessive priority given to the reach notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on is executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-8 is set. Based on reach notice (low) can be executed in preference to setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the reach notice being restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For details, the reach notice (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over the reach notice (low), and the reach notice (low) is set and suggested (low). Priority is given to execution over low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)".

In the feature unit 103SG, the execution ratio of the reach notice may be set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least. It suggests which setting value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the amusement park that the setting suggestion frequently occurs and the player can easily guess which of the set values is. Therefore, in the case of executing the variable display during effect when the super reach fluctuation pattern and the set value are set high, it is preferable for the player to suggest any of them, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. On the other hand, since the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the reach notice appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the super reach variation pattern or the symbol based on the normal reach variation pattern, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display mode is the reach. In this case, the player's expectation for a big hit is higher than in the case of not reaching. Therefore, especially in the case of a jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease and the production will be inappropriate. By giving priority to the setting suggestion to be executed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion as a tendency of the effect during variable display, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and is high. In some situations, such as when the setting is made, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed in preference to the reach notice.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is executed prior to the lottery for the setting suggestion (priority). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery of the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery of the reach notice. , The order is arbitrary. Further, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, it is shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) and 8-17 (B). It is not limited to what is described.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode in which a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as a setting suggestion, it may be suggested whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Therefore, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 8- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach advance notice lottery, the execution of the reach advance notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in 103SGS301 is not won. ) Is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> the setting suggestion (high). > Reach notice (low)> Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see FIG. 8-20 of variant 1))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.
Specifically, even when the variable display that makes the variable display result a big hit is executed, the setting suggestion that can be suggested at the timing other than the variable display is executed with priority over the reach notice. , It becomes impossible to raise the player's expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in 103SGS294 ( High) execution is determined in preference to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the 103SGS298. The part that prioritizes the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 over the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT in the 103SGS298. The part that determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is changed to the pattern PT-8 in the 103SGS301. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B. Executable part.) And
An operation detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation prompting means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify whether the production or the predetermined production of the specific mode can be specified, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the production pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding a setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special aspect) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific aspect) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. As long as it is possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various timings may be used. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory can be executed. If it is suggested about the display result of, the reach notice can be executed at any timing in the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. .. Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

Further, when both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed before the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Includes determining, and performing reach notices based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a higher rate than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, the variable display effect is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As an example, a form in which the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As the effect during variable display, both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result may be included as the effect result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (in the common effect period). It may be a separate production (which does not have a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the first embodiment of the feature unit 103SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-20. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process during variable display as the first modification, and FIG. 8-20 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by prioritizing the execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type over the lottery of the execution of the setting suggestion and the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, the random numbers for determining the effect type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is used to determine whether or not the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) is executed. A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion when the execution is performed (103SGS312).

Although not particularly shown in the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, although the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the set values 1 to 6, the execution ratios of the reach notice and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-20 (B) are different. As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, that is, the decision rate is set to be higher in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined by 50%, setting suggestion is determined by 40%, and non-execution is determined by 10%).

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the reach notice (high) is higher than the reach notice (low) (for example, the reach notice (high) is 40% and the reach notice (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine with. When the set values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) is higher than that of setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35% and setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. That is, the effect control CPU 120 is produced based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You just have to decide what to do.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the embodiment in which the execution rate of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice should be executed at a higher rate than when it is missed, prioritizing the setting suggestion. Is preferable.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although the possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are feasible as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is displayed. It may be possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As a specific effect, for example, when a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, a paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a character is displayed. Display an image of the paraglider in which the paraglider appears, etc.), or display an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (for example, color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be output according to the image display of the paraglider, or the illuminant may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is obtained as the effect result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while the reach notice and the setting suggestion are variable. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect being displayed.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) in a mode different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 8-18 at a different production timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in a mode different from the setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 8-18 (for example, the ending image of the big hit) is given at a timing different from the effect during variable display (for example, after the end of the big hit). It may be feasible.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) as the second embodiment, a first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. And in the second period after the first period, the variable display effect can be executed.

Since the variable display time is short for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Although it is limited to, non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns may be included as execution targets of the effect during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, the presence or absence of the variable display effect execution determination table is used according to the variation pattern using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (B). Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining the effect during variable display are displayed in the variable display effect execution decision table. Is assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 60 out of 100 random numbers for determining the execution of the variable display effect are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect in the variable display effect execution decision table. Individuals are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 8-21 (A).

If it is decided to execute the variable display effect when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, it is executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) and 8-22 (B). The execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at different ratios between the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratios of the setting suggestion and the reach notice are set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The pattern) is determined to be either pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% to determine pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected (low) or expected (high)). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determined to be either PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and at a rate of 60%, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation). (High)) is decided.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. Any of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided as pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 2% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 5% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 15%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice is decided at a rate of 25%. (High)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided on a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be one of -4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 15% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 5% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is used as the effect type of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The rate (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach] as the effect type of the variable display during the first period. It is set higher than the rate (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that becomes the advantageous state suggestion result becomes easier to be executed, so that one game result, that is, a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. Expectations for big hits can be increased.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, regarding the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low)). Or, while the rate at which the setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. As for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern. Any of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined ratio.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are the second. By determining the period at a lower rate than the first period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the second period. ..

Therefore, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, the variable display is in progress. The variable display is caused by the fact that the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice decreases as the effect is repeatedly executed (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed in the first time. By allowing the player to predict that is likely to be super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation that the variable display is super reach is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any of patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is executed, the variable display effect is more likely to be executed in the pattern PT-9, so that the game against the variable display effect being executed in the patterns PT-5 to PT-8. The expectation of the person can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention illustrates this. When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times. When the variable display effect is executed three or more times in this way, the effect type determination ratio is set so that the pattern PT-9 can be easily determined each time the variable display effect is executed. It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the engineer for a longer period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display in-stage effect executed in the first period and in the second period. It is difficult to continuously execute setting suggestions with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display during the first period and in the second period. It is difficult to continuously execute reach notices with the variable display effect. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the reach notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is used in the first period, although the mode in which the reach notice is executed is different from the case of executing the variable display. The rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect may be the same between the case where the variable display effect is executed and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect, and the first period and the second period You can expect the player in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, if the variable display advance notice effect is executed during the same period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined is the same as the variable display notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display notice effect executed in the same period is not limited to this. , The rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio (pattern PT-1 to 1) that determines the execution of the setting suggestion. The ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (pattern). The ratio for determining the execution of the PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, it is set to 40%, which is the same ratio, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (the ratio for determining the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set for the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display during effect (first variable display during effect) executed in the first period is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display during the second period (the second variable display during the effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion in the same way.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach notice and setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. ..

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than the variable display (for example, the ending or variable display of the jackpot game state). It is possible to execute it independently (when it is not executed), but when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable thing is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display in-process effect in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays most attention to, but also the setting suggestion can be executed in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, not only can the chance of executing the setting suggestion be increased, but also the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach notice even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, a non-execution may be determined in which neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion is executed.

When it is possible to determine non-execution in this way, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution rate of the reach notice is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Therefore, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display) capable of executing the predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. The part that can execute the setting suggestion based on
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 8-21 as Example 2). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), in the second number of times after the first number of times, than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. Reach based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period than when the variable display effect is executed. The part that executes the notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect is easily executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the variable display effect executed in the second period is easier to execute the reach notice than the variable display effect executed in the first period. It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled during the second period, which is closer to the timing when the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect at a rate lower than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display during the effect in the first period in the second period after the first period. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern, is executed at a lower rate when the effect during variable display is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for an advantageous state because a predetermined effect of a specific mode is easily executed at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is a special pattern pattern PT-. 8 or the part to be executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given as the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to 1. The part to be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode, but it becomes difficult to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode. Therefore, the advantageous state is obtained at a timing close to one game result. Expectations can be raised suitably.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect may be executed even during the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode or a predetermined effect of a specific mode before the variable display that results in one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). Image etc.) Display part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) capable of executing a predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is provided.
The production mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, a setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4) that suggests the setting, and a setting and a type suggested by the first suggestion mode. Includes a second suggestion embodiment (eg, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions for different settings.
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 2 as a second embodiment). As shown in 8-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, and after the first number of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and 8 to 28 to 8). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach as the second and third embodiments, The part that executes the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing the variable display effect in the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed, so that the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is executed is maintained. Can be done.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect executed during the second period suggests a setting (stronger) than the variable display effect executed during the first period. Is easy to execute, so that the player's expectation that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a high set value such as 4 to 6 can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion. The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode in which the setting suggested in the mode and the setting of a different type are suggested, is a form suggesting an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be any one as long as it suggests a setting different from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode, for example, the first suggestion. The set value suggested in the embodiment and the set value suggested in the second suggested embodiment may all be different set values (for example, the first suggested embodiment suggests the set value 1 and the second suggested embodiment is set). When the value 6 is suggested, when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even number settings 2, 4, 6), the first suggestion mode suggests. A common setting value may be included in both the setting value to be set and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the setting values 1 to 4 and the second suggestion mode is Even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion about a setting change and the other is a suggestion about a set value that is set. Good. That is, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting to be suggested when there are a plurality of setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. Includes those with different numbers and ranges of values, or those with different suggestions.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is specified including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the case The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
Specifically, after setting the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion to be the same (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period) in the first period and the second period, the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, it is possible to avoid excessive execution of the setting suggestion. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, as compared with the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a higher rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect of the special aspect being executed increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
In Example 2, if the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, the reach notice can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode or a predetermined effect of a specific mode before the variable display that results in one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). Image etc.) Display part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
The predetermined effect of the specific mode is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is different from the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the easiness of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while the second period. In, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, but also Since the reach notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased. In the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. ..

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.
In Example 2, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made the same while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display during the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice. In the second period, which is close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is easily executed, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the effect during variable display during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). Set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
When the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value is set different from the first set value among the plurality of set values, a plurality of times Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at the same ratio in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the pachinko game is performed for the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part where the suggestion is executed at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the first set value and the second set value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change at the predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed. On the other hand, we can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed in the first period regardless of which of the values 1 to 6 is set as the set value. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance status) and the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect during the second period (appearance status) are the same, that is, the set value is Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion.

In the second embodiment, even if any of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period. Although the mode in which the ratio (appearance status) is not different from the ratio (appearance status) in which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, the ratio (appearance status) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6. If the ratio (appearance status) of the setting suggestion being executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is the same, the setting values (for example, 3 to 6) other than the above two setting values are the second. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be the same in the first period and the second period.

Further, only in the variable display effect of either the variable display effect executed in the first period or the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 1 to 6 set values. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effect executed in the second period The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be different.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period). Then, the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the first. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different ratios depending on the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the variable execution is performed in the first period. For the display effect, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed during the second period is set for the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period is from the start to the end of super reach, the first period is from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period is normal reach. Or until the end of Super Reach, or by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like the variable display of, the first period is set as the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is set as the start timing of the second re-variable display, and the like. , May correspond to the revariable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the same number of variable display effects can be reached regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is shown in which the execution of the notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B) as Example 3, the effect during variable display is 2 during one variable display. When it is possible to execute the game times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the effect is being variablely displayed the same number of times. You may.

When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the second period to be executed in the first period are shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at the same ratio for each of the variable display during production executed in.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. Determined to be -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. In, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 40%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 45%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a ratio of 47%, and a ratio of 3%. In, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 50%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 55%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 17.5%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and 2 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 30% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and determined at a rate of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. 2. Determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and 22.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 40 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 27.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , 4.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the first period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any of 1 to 6. Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the production type of the effect during variable display, and the variable display is executed in the second period. The ratio at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the medium effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display to be executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type differs between the set value (for example, set value 6). , Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, a pattern is set as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( High)} is determined more often. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting is suggested as compared with the case where a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, so that it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect executed in the second period is the effect type of the pattern PT-9 rather than the variable display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 becomes easier to be executed, so that the player's expectation that the variable display effect is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined is the same between the effect and the variable display effect executed in the second period. Although the embodiment in which the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined at the same ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be determined at different rates, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice The rate at which (high)} is determined may be different.

In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, which are the same as the variable display effect. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion by the ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period and the case where the effect is executed in the second period The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as these variable display effects depending on the case of executing the variable display effect. By doing so, the rate (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, a variable display effect (first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and a variable display executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as the middle effect (the second variable display during effect), an example is provided in which the reach notice is executed at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as (the second variable display effect), if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the reach notice is given at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may do it. By doing so, if the effect is during variable display the same number of times, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The player can still expect the reach notice to be executed by the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect).
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period, and more than in the first period. The part where the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as in the case of executing the variable display effect in the second period later)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, there are cases where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and a case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 8-27) as the intermediate effect, it is set between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. The player can be expected to do the same for the suggestion to be executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). , The pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the variable display effect in the first period. The part that executes reach notice based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In Example 3, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made different while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(7th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started).
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at different ratios at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display in the first period. When executing, the part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. ..
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is. Since the execution rate (appearance status) of the setting suggestion changes depending on whether the medium effect is executed or the variable display medium effect is executed in the second period, the player can perform not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion in.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the second. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same ratio as when the effect during variable display is executed during the period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the first period Although the embodiment of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value in each of the second period and the second period is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is not limited to this. Determines whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value. It may be decided which to be executed, that is, whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period according to different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as Example 4, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach are targeted for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. It is possible to execute the variable display effect in the second period after the first period. Since the variable display time is short for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period. In the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-33.

As shown in FIGS. 8-33, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. Then, it is determined whether the specified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, it proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. In this case, since it is not the target of the variable display effect, the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out to specify the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the set value specified in 103SGS313, whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the variable display effect is executed are determined by a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). It is determined using (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in the 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display during effect execution determination table whose fluctuation pattern is common to normal reach or super reach, and reaches notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on one of. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. It is set so that the larger the value is, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion and the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-35, paying attention to the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the first period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 18%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined not to be executed at a rate of 12.5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 45.5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 10%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 3.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a ratio of 5%, and a ratio of 40%. To determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined (103SGS315), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (patterns PT-1 to PT). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317). Proceed to 103SGS318. If execution is not decided in 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is decided, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined to be normal reach, the second is based on the specified fluctuation pattern and set value. Whether or not the variable display effect is executed during the period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the effect is executed are determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), in 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the variable display during effect execution determination table for normal reach. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the case where the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (setting suggestion) at a rate of 33%. Low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 3%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 6%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, it is the super reach, whether or not the variable display during the second period is executed and the execution are performed based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) in the case of performing is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), in the 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach. .. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute. Do not decide. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of super reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4%. The ratio was determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55% to determine pattern PT-9 { Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.8%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 33.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1). ~ PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and the variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323). ), Ends the effect during variable display. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS321, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the variable display during effect ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. When deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on which of 6 is executed, and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period, it depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Reach notice or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate judgment table. That is, since the judgment criteria for whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach notice is given in the second period. Is easier to execute, so even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, the setting suggestion does not become easier to execute in both the first period and the second period, and , Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

Further, since the execution rate of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach notice in the first period, it is variablely displayed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 to 8-37, paying attention to each set value, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not included. When the execution of the reach notice is decided at the same ratio (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko machine 1. It is decided at the same ratio (60%). Therefore, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach notice is executed. The player can be noticed in the same way.

In addition, even if the set value is set high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice easier to execute than the setting suggestion in the second period, but also the super reach In this case, the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than in the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period. Is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, The higher the setting is in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestion is determined than the reach notice. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to appear. It will be easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different ratios depending on whether the variable display effect (the second variable display effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The execution of the reach notice may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player similarly expect the execution of the reach notice in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, if the effect is during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the same number of variable display during productions, the reach notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed.

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
Whether the variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit" or "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111. The part that determines the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not)
A variable display means capable of executing variable display according to a determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is performing variable display. In the effect processing, a decorative pattern is displayed based on a display result or a variable pattern specified by an effect control command. The part that executes variable display) and
Predetermined effect determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect pattern of the variable display effect is the pattern PT-1 to PT-9. The part that decides one from),
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. Setting suggestion or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) and
With
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as the fourth embodiment, a portion in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. ),
Based on at least the set value, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control is performed. The part in which the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value in the variable display effect in the first period),
At least based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times is determined (for example, Example). As shown in FIG. 8-33 as No. 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern set in the variable display effect in the second period. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the determination criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-33, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect in the first period (the first variable display effect), the variable display is being performed based on the variable display variation pattern. Determine the production type of the production * Isn't it a set value? (Refer to 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (second variable display effect) in the second period, the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1. Based on the value, the effect type of the variable display effect is determined (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). In other words, since the judgment criteria for determining the effect type are different between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect It is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being decided by, and it is possible to suppress that the effect during variable display becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, the effect control CPU 120 gives a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Part to be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the pattern PT is obtained when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. -8 or the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the variable display effect during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are the first. A part in which the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value when the variable display effect is executed in two periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, in the first period, a mode of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, it is decided whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according only to the set value. You may.

Further, in the second period, an example is exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, an embodiment in which it is determined whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may decide whether or not.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. An example has been made in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the second period after the first period. The effect is not limited to the above, and the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, the variable display of one variable display is simulated multiple times. It may be executed at the timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect shown as.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 as a modification 2, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach, and super reach. Therefore, the first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, the second period after the first period and corresponding to the revariable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and It is possible to execute the effect during variable display in the third period, which is after the second period and corresponds to the revariable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

In the second modification, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. The second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the second period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the second decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed according to the revariable display.

In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, any of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the first period regardless of which the fluctuation pattern is. Variable display is in progress according to whether it is set to. For the second and third periods, variable display is being performed based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Executes the process of determining the type of effect.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (the execution of the reach notice is not determined). It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the second period, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40% and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60% only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the second period and the second. When the variable display effect is executed in the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. That is, since the determination criteria when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period and the second period or the third period, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of revariable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, .... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first revariable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second revariable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach notice, and the third revariation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, since the fluctuation pattern has a high possibility of super reach, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach notice and the decrease in the reliability of the reach notice in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by one or two pseudo continuous effects. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big hit from being lowered due to the frequent occurrence of setting suggestions in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous effects.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period when the jackpot reliability is the lowest, the setting suggestion is preferred because the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach than the suggestion. Since the decision is given priority, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period. If so, it does not have to determine the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100%. Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice is illustrated, but the execution of the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Further, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion, the reach notice is announced. The execution does not have to be determined at a 100% rate.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the normal reach or the super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period are not limited thereto. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

Further, in the present modification 2, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of forms are illustrated. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if at least the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion or the change pattern is determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern. The reach notice may be decided.

Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined prior to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern is illustrated. It is not limited, and in the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first of the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by making the ratio at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the ratio at which the reach notice is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the setting suggestion may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is announced by making the ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the second period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the reach notice may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach notices and setting suggestions are given. It may be feasible over variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about the variable display whose execution is suspended when the start winning prize occurs (for example, a display result (including a jackpot type) or a random number value for determining a fluctuation pattern). The display result and the fluctuation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can perform the effect control CPU 120. When the pre-reading notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect in a variable display of the 103SG277 at a predetermined timing. An example of a mode in which a process of executing a process of destroying and changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process into images Z2 indicating that the images Z1 are dropped has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 is changed at the timing corresponding to the operation. You may let it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. As the operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image or a button image of "continuous hitting!") May be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B when the push sensor 35B detects a specific operation of operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In that case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be terminated without giving a reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, the player who knows the specific motion can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

As an operation promotion effect for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B, an operation promotion image for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 in which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light emitting unit built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific movement or the player who notices the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a mode in which a reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The predetermined effect, which is the result of suggesting an advantageous state, is a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol stops, a character notice in which a character appears, and a step in which the notice image changes stepwise. Various warning effects can be applied as long as it is a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit, such as a close-up notice or a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 for the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image is made larger than the display area of the second effect image, or the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast is different. Is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, so that the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When drawing the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image display device 5 draws the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer. When the images are combined and displayed in duplicate, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image because the first effect image is duplicated in the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach notice in preference to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound effects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice corresponds to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the audibility of, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to hear than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but also the volume of other sounds such as BGM is decreased to enhance the audibility. May be good. It should be noted that the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. At the same time, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced in the first reproduction channel By making the volume and sound quality different (improving) from the volume and sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second playback channel, the audibility of the first production sound is made higher than the audibility of the second production sound. It is also possible to prioritize the reach notice over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color, the lighting mode, and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice is the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the sex, that is, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to see than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off without being turned on in response to the setting suggestion.

That is, to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In some cases, not only the execution rate of the reach notice is increased, but also when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the effect mode such as the reach notice display, sound, and light is more than the setting suggestion effect mode. Including priority. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, and sound are such that the effect of the reach notice given to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing different production modes such as light, light, and movement of a movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the setting suggestion, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, a mode suggesting which of the set values 1 to 6 is set is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, for example, the possibility that the set value has been changed or the possibility that the set value has not been changed (deferred) may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is illustrated as an example of an advantageous state advantageous for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball is paid out more than in the normal state. A high base state (time saving state) that makes it easier for the conditions to be met, a high probability gaming state (high probability state) that has a high probability of becoming a big hit game state, a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), and a special reach state (for example). , Super reach, etc.), including the state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

Further, in the slot machine, the advantageous state for the player is a state in which a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the winning probability of a small winning combination, or a state in which an operation mode advantageous for the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), A state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (assist replay time) state) and the like.

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed on a slot machine, a special role such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not aligned and is carried over to the special role. Suggestion effects that suggest the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols may be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions that suggest the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or the AT state. It is possible to execute the game over a plurality of games (multiple variable displays) until the AT state or the ART state is won and the AT state or the ART state is started.

(Explanation of feature 097IW)
Next, the feature unit 097IW will be described.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 097IW. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for detachment. Further, FIG. 9-1 (B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for big hits. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in this example, when the deviation occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1 to PA5. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB2 to PB5.

In this example, the variation pattern PA1 is a variation pattern that specifies normal variation. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA2 and PB2 are fluctuation patterns that specify that normal reach is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3 and PB3 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach A is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA4 and PB4 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach B is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA5 and PB5 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach C is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, when the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) is executed, the expectation for the big hit is compared with the case where the normal reach is executed. The degree (reliability) is high. Of the three types of super reach, when Super Reach C is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when Super Reach B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is next. High, and when Super Reach A is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest. Therefore, in this example, the normal reach and the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) are effects that suggest whether or not the hit is a big hit, and which type of reach is executed. Expectations (reliability) for big hits differ depending on the situation.

Next, the operation of the effect control means (effect control CPU 120) will be described.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 097IWS101). Next, the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command (effect control command for designating the variation pattern) read in step 097IWS101, and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command (that is, the received display result specification command). The display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and the effect control command that specifies the big hit type) (step 097IWS102). That is, by executing the process of step 097IWS102 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 097IWS102, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 097IWS102, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are the same probability variation symbol (for example, an odd number symbol) as the stop symbol. Determine the combination. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command normally indicates a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are the same non-probability variation symbols (for example, even symbols) as stop symbols. To determine. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the small hit symbol (for example, a combination of the symbols of "135") is determined as the stop symbol. If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, the combination of decorative symbols with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance-up effect setting process for setting the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect during super reach (step 097IWS103). In this example, the “chance-up effect” is an effect that is executed in such a manner that the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased) during the execution of the super reach.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the chance-up effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the chance-up effect are determined (step 097IWS104). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 097IWS105).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set.

Further, in particular, in the case of a fluctuation pattern with super reach A to C (variation patterns PA3 to PA5, PB3 to PB5), a process table including super reach A to C is selected in step 097IWS104, and the process table is selected. By executing the process of step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, when executing Super Reach A to C, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the chance-up effect setting process of step 097IWS103, the process table including the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104. By executing the processing of step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the selected process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the chance is increased. The production is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 097IWS106).

In this feature unit 097IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 097IWS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 097IWS108), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Chance up production setting process)
FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing the chance-up effect setting process (step 097IWS103). In the chance-up effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA3, PB3) including the super reach A (step 097IWS201). ). If it is a variation pattern including the super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table A as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS202). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If it is not a fluctuation pattern including super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern including super reach B (variation patterns PA4, PB4) ( Step 097IWS203). If it is a variation pattern including the super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table B as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS204). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If it is not a fluctuation pattern including super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern including super reach C (fluctuation patterns PA5 and PB5) ( Step 097IWS205). If it is a variation pattern including the super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table C as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS206). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If the variation pattern does not include the super reach C (N in step 097IWS205), that is, if the variation pattern includes the non-reach loss or the normal reach, the chance-up effect setting process is terminated as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the chance-up effect determination table selected in steps 097IWS202, S204, and S206, and determines the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS207).

9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-4 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table A selected in step 097IWS202. Further, FIG. 9-5 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table B selected in step 097IWS204. Further, FIG. 9-6 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table C selected in step 097IWS206.

First, the chance-up effect determination table A (chance-up effect determination table for super reach A) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the chance-up effect determination table A, determination values are assigned to each of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effects A1 to A7.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when Super Reach A is executed, in principle, four images of Image A1, Image A2, Image A3, and Image A4 are displayed during the execution of Super Reach A. It is displayed in order. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, these images A1, image A2, image A3 and image A4 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special aspects, and when these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in blue, green, and red, chances are increased. It corresponds to the state in which the production is being executed. Therefore, in this example, when the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach A, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

In this example, the image A1 displayed in the super reach A, the image A2, the image A3, the image A4, the image B1 displayed in the super reach B described later, the image B2, the image B3, and the super described later. The image C1 and the image C2 displayed during the reach C are also referred to as a chance-up image.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects A1 to A7 executed during the super reach A. The "chance-up effect A1" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect A2" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect A3" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect A1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect A3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the chance-up effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in green or red. The “chance-up effect A4” is a chance-up effect in which the images A1 and A2 are displayed in a blue display color, and then the images A3 and A4 are displayed in a green display color. Further, in the "chance-up effect A5", after the images A1 and A2 are displayed in the blue display color, the image A3 is displayed in the green display color, and the image A4 is further displayed in the red display color. It is an up production. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a display color with a low), it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the jackpot changes from the display color with low expectation. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. May occur. The “chance-up effect A6” is a chance-up effect in which the image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach B is displayed instead of the image A1, and then the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in order. In this example, when a common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image A2, image A3, image A4) is displayed in a rainbow-colored display color. By displaying in a rainbow-colored display color different from blue, green, and red in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the chance-up image.

In this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in rainbow colors, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased), so the rainbow-colored display color also corresponds to the special mode.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect A7" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 are displayed in a white display color, and then the image A4 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

Next, the chance-up effect determination table B (chance-up effect determination table for super reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-5. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the chance-up effect determination table B, determination values are assigned to each of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effects B1 to B7.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, when Super Reach B is executed, in principle, three images, Image B1, Image B2, and Image B3, are displayed in order during the execution of Super Reach B. To. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in blue, green, and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to the state being done. Therefore, in this example, when the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach B, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects B1 to B7 executed during the super reach B. The "chance-up effect B1" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B2" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B3" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect B1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect B3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect B2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in green or red. The "chance-up effect B4" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in a blue display color and then the image B2 and the image B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B5" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in the blue display color, the image B2 is displayed in the green display color, and the image B3 is displayed in the red display color. is there. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a display color with a low), it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the jackpot changes from the display color with low probability. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. May occur. The "chance-up effect B6" is a chance-up effect in which the image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach A is displayed instead of the image B1, and then the image B2 and the image B3 are displayed in order. In this example, when a common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image B2, image B3) is displayed in a rainbow-colored display color. By displaying in a rainbow-colored display color different from blue, green, and red in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect B7" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 and the image B2 are displayed in a white display color, and then the image B3 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

Next, the chance-up effect determination table C (chance-up effect determination table for super reach C) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-6. As shown in FIG. 9-6, in the chance-up effect determination table C, determination values are assigned to each of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effects C1 to C5.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when Super Reach C is executed, in principle, two images, Image C1 and Image C2, are displayed in order during the execution of Super Reach C. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, these images C1 and C2 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images C1 and images C2 are displayed in blue, green, and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to the state. Therefore, in this example, when the image C1 or the image C2 is displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach C, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, there are five types of chance-up effects C1 to C5 executed during Super Reach C. The "chance-up effect C1" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect C2" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect C3" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the chance-up effect C1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect C3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect C2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C4” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in the green display color and then the image C2 is displayed in the red display color. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is high. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a low display color, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the jackpot changes from the display color with low probability. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-6, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C5” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in a white display color and then the image C2 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C5 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

In this example, the presence / absence of the chance-up effect and the display color of each chance-up image are collectively determined by one lottery process using the chance-up effect determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6. However, the case is not limited to such a mode. For example, when executing Super Reach A, if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in one lottery process, the display colors of each chance-up image (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are individually displayed. It may be configured to be decided by the lottery process of.

Further, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes, it is set in advance so that the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the jackpot does not change from the display color with low (it does not decrease). Although the case where the pattern (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4) is determined is shown, it is not limited to such a determination method. For example, if the display color of each chance-up image is determined by individual lottery processing, prohibition processing is performed so that the chance-up image displayed later does not become lower than the chance-up image displayed earlier. May be configured to do. In this case, for example, when the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed first is determined and the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later is determined, the expectation is higher than or the same as the display color. By performing the lottery process using the determination table including only the display color, the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be determined. Further, for example, when a display color having a lower expectation than the chance-up image displayed earlier is determined, the determination result is discarded, and a display color having a higher expectation or the same expectation than the display color is displayed. It may be configured to repeatedly execute the process of determining the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later until the determination is made.

Further, the types of chance-up effects are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6. For example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), the display color changes stepwise in the order of blue, green, and red. However, for example, it may be configured so that there is a pattern in which green is skipped and the color changes from blue to red.

Further, for example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), after the chance-up image is displayed in the earlier display color, it is later. The case where the displayed chance-up image is configured to be displayed in a different display color from the previous one (the display color itself of the chance-up image once displayed does not change in the middle) is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when executing Super Reach A, there may be a pattern in which the image A1 is displayed in blue as a chance-up image, and then the display color of the image A1 itself changes to green or red. ..

Further, in this example, when Super Reach A and B are executed, there is a case where a common image X is displayed as the first chance-up image (chance-up effects A6 and B6). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, all the chance-up images displayed in Super Reach A and B may be configured to be displayed in the common image X, or two or three chance-up images may be displayed in the common image X. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this example, the common image X may be displayed only when the super reach A and B are executed, but the common image X is also displayed when the super reach C is executed. May be configured so that there is a pattern in which is displayed.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode) and then the chance-up image is displayed in red (special mode) (chance-up effects A7, B7, C5), the jackpot is confirmed. Although the case of allocating the judgment value as described above is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the chance-up image changes from white (normal mode) to red (special mode), it may be configured so that it may shift with a low probability.

Further, for example, the chance-up image may be configured to have a pattern that changes from white (normal aspect) to blue, green, or rainbow color as a special aspect.

Further, even when the chance-up image changes from blue to green or red or from green to red as in the chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4, the jackpot is confirmed. It may be configured to allocate the judgment value so that the judgment value may be assigned.

Further, in this example, the case where three types of super reach A to C are executablely configured has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of super reach can be executed. It may be configured so that only two types of super reach can be executed. Further, a type of super reach that does not display the chance-up image and does not execute the chance-up effect may be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the chance-up image can be displayed up to 4 times during the super reach is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the chance-up image can be displayed 5 times or more. Good.

As described above, various modes can be considered as the mode of the chance-up effect.

(Variable display production processing)
FIG. 9-7 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 097IWS301) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 097IWS302). When the process timer times out (step 097IWS303), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 097IWS304). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 097IWS305).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed (step 097IWS306). If none of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the display timing of any of the chance-up images (step 097IWS307). If it is the display timing of the chance-up image, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color (white, blue, green, red,) of the chance-up image to be displayed in the image display device 5 by the chance-up effect setting process. Control to display in (rainbow color) (step 097IWS308). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the effect display around the chance-up image in the same display color (white, blue, green, red, rainbow) as the displayed chance-up image. (Step 097IWS309).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display color of the displayed chance-up image or effect image is white (normal mode) (step 097IWS310). If the display color is white (normal aspect), the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If the display color is not white (normal mode) (that is, if it is a special mode), the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 097IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316.

By executing the processing of steps 097IWS310 and S311, in this example, the notification sound is output only when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode, so that the player is aware only when the expectation for the big hit is high. Can be made to.

If it is not the display timing of the chance-up image (N in step 097IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is within the operation valid period of the push button 31B (step 097IWS312). In this example, an operation valid period is provided in the latter half of the production period of each of the super reach A to C, and when the push button 31B is pressed within the operation valid period, or without the push button 31B being operated. When the operation valid period elapses, the image display device 5 controls to display a success / failure result notification that notifies whether or not a big hit is achieved. In this example, the display timing of each chance-up image is set in the first half of the production period of each super reach A to C (the period before the operation valid period), and each chance-up image can be displayed. It is configured so that the period during which the operation is valid and the period during which the result notification can be displayed do not overlap.

If it is not within the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. Within the operation valid period, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the push button 31 is turned on (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input) (step 097IWS313). ). If the push button 31 is turned on, the process proceeds to step 097IWS315.

If the push button 31 is not turned on, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the operation valid period (step 097IWS314). If it is not the end timing of the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If the push button 31 is turned on (Y in step 097IWS313), or if the end timing of the operation valid period is reached (Y in step 097IWS314), the effect control CPU 120 determines the result in the image display device 5. Control to display the notification (step 097IWS315).

In step 097IWS315, the effect control CPU 120 confirms, for example, the display result indicated by the display result designation command, and if it becomes a big hit, controls to display a character display such as "big hit" as a hit / fail result notification. .. In addition, in the case of a loss, control is performed to display a character display such as "miss" as a notification of the result of success or failure.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 097IWS316). If the fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 097IWS317), and ends the variable display effect process.

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the display timing of the chance-up image during execution of Super Reach and the notification of the result of success / failure will be described. FIG. 9-8 is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image during execution of the super reach and the notification of the result of success / failure. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, as an example, a case where the chance-up effect A3 is executed when the super reach A is executed is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, at the timing T1, the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and then at the timing T2, the reach is established and the normal reach is started. Then, at the timing T3, when the development timing to super reach comes, super reach A is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the images A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 can be displayed as the chance-up images during the execution of the super reach A. As shown in FIG. 9-8, in this example, the images A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in the period T3 to T4 in the first half of the production period of the super reach A before the operation valid period. Is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, in this example, when the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are displayed, the effect image is also displayed at the same time. In addition, the effect image is displayed in the same display color as the chance-up image. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the case where the effect image is displayed in red corresponding to each chance-up image being displayed in red is shown.

Note that FIG. 9-8 is an example. When each chance amplifier image is displayed in green, the effect image is also displayed in green, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, the effect image is also displayed. If it is displayed in blue and each chance amplifier image is displayed in rainbow color, the effect image is also displayed in rainbow color, and if each chance amplifier image is displayed in white (normal mode), the effect image is also displayed. Displayed in white (normal aspect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, in the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach A, for example, when the operation valid period is started from the timing T4 and the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected within the operation valid period, The display of the hit / fail result notification is started from the timing (timing T5) when the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected. If the push button 31B is not operated within the operation valid period, the display of the result notification is started at the end of the operation valid period. Then, when the variation time ends (timing T6), the variation display of the decorative symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5.

In this example, when the operation is not performed, the display of the success / failure result notification is started at the end of the operation valid period, but the case is not limited to such a mode and the operation is not performed. May be configured not to display the result notification.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, in this example, the chance-up image and the effect image can be displayed in the production in the first half of the execution period of the super reach, and the pass / fail result notification can be displayed in the production in the latter half. is there. In addition, it is restricted not to display chance-up images and effect images in the production during the latter half of the period. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the notification of the result of success or failure.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the chance-up image and the effect image can be displayed only in the production during the first half of the execution period of the super reach, and the result is notified in the production in the latter half. Although it shows a case where is designed in advance so that it can be displayed, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, regardless of the timing during the execution period of Super Reach, the chance-up image or effect image can be displayed, and when the display timing of the chance-up image or effect image comes, the operation validity period If the inside or the result notification is being displayed, the prohibition process may be performed so as not to display the chance-up image or the effect image.

Further, for example, instead of displaying the chance-up image or the effect image at all during the operation valid period or the display of the pass / fail result notification, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed at an extremely low rate. .. Further, for example, when the operation valid period or the success / failure result notification is being displayed, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed in an inconspicuous display mode such as reducing the display size. It suffices if the display of the chance-up image or the effect image is restricted in some form.

(Example of super reach production)
Next, the production mode of super reach will be described. 9-9 to 9-16 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the super reach. Of these, FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach A accompanied by a chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 show specific examples of the effect mode of Super Reach B accompanied by the chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach A without the chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach B without the chance-up effect. In addition, in FIG. 9-9 to FIG. 9-16, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, an effect mode of Super Reach A accompanied by a chance-up effect will be described. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, a case where the execution of the chance-up effect A3 is determined will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach A rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), when Super Reach A is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image A1 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW12 imitating a bird as the image A1. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), the effect image 097IW13 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW14 that imitates a bird different from the image A1 as the image A2. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW14 as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E) (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the effect image 097IW15 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW16 as the image A3, which imitates a bird different from the images A1 and A2. .. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the effect image 097IW17 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes to the display timing of the image A4, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), in the image display device 5, as the image A4, an image 097IW18 that imitates a bird different from the images A1, the image A2, and the image A3 is displayed. Is displayed. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW18 as shown in FIG. 9-10 (G) (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), the effect image 097IW19 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12, an effect mode of Super Reach B accompanied by a chance-up effect will be described. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12, a case where the execution of the chance-up effect B3 is determined will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach B rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), when Super Reach B is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW22 imitating the moon as the image B1. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, the moon is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW22 as shown in FIG. 9-11 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (D), the effect image 097IW23 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW22 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW24 imitating Jupiter as the image B2. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Jupiter is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW24 as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), the effect image 097IW25 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW24 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW26 imitating Saturn as the image B3. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Saturn is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW26 as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F), the effect image 097IW27 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW26 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14, an effect mode of Super Reach A without a chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14, it is assumed that the chance-up effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 9-13 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach A rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (C), when Super Reach A is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image A1 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW32 imitating a bird as the image A1. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW32 as shown in FIG. 9-13 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (D), the effect image 097IW33 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW32 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW34 as the image A2, which imitates a bird different from the image A1. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW34 as shown in FIG. 9-14 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (E), the effect image 097IW35 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW34 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW36 that imitates a bird different from the image A1 and the image A2 as the image A3. .. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW36 as shown in FIG. 9-14 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (F), the effect image 097IW37 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW36 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image A4 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (G), in the image display device 5, as the image A4, an image 097IW38 that imitates a bird different from the images A1, the image A2, and the image A3 Is displayed. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW38 as shown in FIG. 9-14 (G) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (G), the effect image 097IW39 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW38 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16, an effect mode of Super Reach B without a chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16, it is assumed that the chance-up effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach B rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), when Super Reach B is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW42 imitating the moon as the image B1. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the moon is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW42 as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the effect image 097IW43 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW42 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW44 imitating Jupiter as the image B2. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Jupiter is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW44 as shown in FIG. 9-16 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (E), the effect image 097IW45 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW44 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW46 imitating Saturn as the image B3. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Saturn is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW46 as shown in FIG. 9-16 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (F), the effect image 097IW47 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW46 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16, unlike the chance-up image, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 do not change in particular depending on whether they are out-of-order fluctuations or jackpot fluctuations. , It is an image displayed in a display mode not related to the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Further, in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16, Super Reach A and Super Reach B are shown as an example, but when Super Reach C is executed, it is executed in a similar manner. For example, FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16 show a case where an image imitating a bird or an image of a celestial body is displayed as a chance-up image, but when Super Reach C is executed, another image is used as a chance-up image. (For example, an image imitating a vehicle such as a car or an airplane) is displayed, and these chance-up images are displayed in a special aspect (blue, green, red) or in the same manner as in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16. It may be displayed in a normal mode (white), or the effect image may be displayed in a special mode (blue, green, red) or a normal mode (white).

Further, for example, when the chance-up effect A6 or the chance-up effect B6 is executed, a common image (for example, a common character image or a common item image) is used as the image X instead of the image A1 and the image B1. The common image X and the effect image are displayed in rainbow colors, and the chance-up image and effect image displayed thereafter are also displayed in rainbow colors.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-13 to 9-16, the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are displayed during the execution of super reach A, and the super The chance-up image is displayed by adding the effect image of the common white display color in the case of displaying the chance-up image (image B1, image B2, image B3) during the execution of reach B. The aspect of the common effect image to be performed is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an image having the exact same shape and the same display color (for example, an effect image) may be added to display a chance-up image, or an image having a different shape but the same display color may be added. A common image may be added to display a chance-up image. When displaying the chance-up image in the normal mode as such, not only when the effect element such as the exact same image is added, but also the effect element such as a similar image may be added, and in some form. Anything may be used as long as it is configured to display a chance-up image by adding a common effect element.

As described above, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least the first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and the second specific effect (for example, super reach B), and the specific image. At least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, the second specific image (for example) during the execution of the second specific effect). For example, image B1, image B2, and image B3) can be displayed. In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21. The display mode of is not changed). Further, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, a first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) can be added to display the specific image. When displaying a specific image, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) can be added to display the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Specifically, when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color), only the effect image in the special mode is displayed, and the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode (for example, white). If it is configured not to display any effect image when displaying, the player cannot be made to recognize that the chance-up image is a preview image. Therefore, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode, the effect image in the normal mode is displayed, so that the player knows that the chance-up image is a preview image. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in the normal mode (when the chance is not increased), the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color (white in this example). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being unnecessarily conspicuous when the chance is not increased, and conversely, to increase the recognition degree when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode.

The addition of the first special effect element or the second special effect element may be configured to generate and display an image in which an effect image is added to the chance-up image, or the chance-up image and the effect. The process of synthesizing the image is not executed, but the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the vicinity or superimposed, and it looks as if the effect image is added to the chance-up image. May be good.

Further, the first special effect element and the second special effect element are not limited to the effect image, but other images (for example, character image and item image) displayed so as to be added to the chance-up image in some form. ) May be. Further, for example, as the first special effect element or the second special effect element, a lamp or LED near the display area of the chance-up image is displayed, or a predetermined effect sound is output in a manner associated with the chance-up image. It may be, and any effect element may be added in some form.

Further, in this example, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 are shown as specific examples of the "predetermined image", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, during the execution of super reach, the background image or the item image may be displayed as a predetermined image in a manner that does not change regardless of the degree of expectation.

Further, in this example, the case where the super reach A to C is executed is shown as a specific example of the "specific effect", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a notice effect or a pseudo-ream is configured to be executable as a specific effect, and a chance-up image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode and an effect image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during the execution of the notice effect or the pseudo-ream. It may be configured to do so. Further, for example, a promotion effect suggesting whether or not to be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot during the jackpot game may be configured to be executable as a specific effect, and the chance-up image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during the execution of the promotion effect. The effect image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. As such, various modes can be considered as specific effects.

Further, in this example, regarding "the predetermined image is a display mode not related to the expectation degree controlled in the advantageous state", specifically, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 other than the chance-up image is shown. As shown, "not related" means that the expectation for a big hit like the chance-up image is not an element that raises the chance. Therefore, even when displaying images other than these chance-up images, those with different expectations (reliability) for big hits are included depending on the type of super reach itself in which those images are displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific image is displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state. The first specific image is displayed by adding the first special effect element (for example, an effect image of blue, green, red, and rainbow display colors) of the display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image that can be displayed. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image depending on the display mode of the added first special effect element.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to display an image of a common mode (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, and it is common when displaying the image of the common mode. It is possible to display the first specific image and the second specific image by adding the first special effect element (for example, an effect image of a rainbow-colored display color). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, output of a notification sound) when a specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element. Further, when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element, the notification effect is not executed. Therefore, the player can be made aware of it only when the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high.

In this example, a common notification sound is output regardless of whether the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in any of the display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when a common image X is displayed as a chance-up image and a chance-up image or effect image is displayed in rainbow colors, a dedicated notification sound different from that of blue, green, or red is output. It may be configured. Further, even when the chance-up image or the effect image is displayed in blue, green, or red, different notification sounds may be output depending on whether the image is blue, green, or red.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) of changing a specific image to which the second special effect element is added into a specific image to which the first special effect element is added. Is. Therefore, the expectation can be maintained even when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, the production of the first period (for example, the production of the first half of the production period of Super Reach A to C) and whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state after the first period. It is possible to execute a specific effect including a second period effect (for example, an effect in the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) including an effect of notifying the result (for example, notification of a result of success or failure). Further, the specific image can be displayed during the first period, and the display of the specific image is restricted during the second period (see FIG. 9-8). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state.

In this example, the case where the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the operation valid period in the latter half of the super reach and the period for displaying the pass / fail result notification is not limited to such a mode. For example, when performing an effect that develops from a weak reach with low expectations to a strong reach with high expectations during super reach, chance-up images and effect images are frequently displayed during the weak reach, and are strong. During the reach period, the chance-up image and the effect image may be hidden or restricted.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and the execution of the specific effect It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image. In addition, a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B) can be executed. In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21. The display mode of is not changed). Further, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, a first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) can be added to display the specific image. When displaying a specific image, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) can be added to display the specific image. Then, the specific image can be displayed a different number of times depending on whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, the supermarket is displayed. Reach A can display the chance-up image four times (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4), and Super Reach B can display the chance-up image three times (image B1, image B2, image B3). is there). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, when the specific image is displayed a plurality of times, when the specific image is displayed the first time and then the specific image is displayed the second time, the first time is performed at a high rate. It is possible to display a specific image in a mode having a higher degree of expectation of being controlled in a more advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4. Is feasible). Therefore, even when the specific image is displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation is low in the first time, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation for the specific image displayed in the second time.

In this example, when performing Super Reach C, which has the highest expectation for a big hit among Super Reach A to C, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is the smallest at 2 times, and the expectation for a big hit is the next highest. When Super Reach B is executed, the chance-up image is displayed 3 times, and when Super Reach A, which has the lowest expectation for a big hit, is displayed, the chance-up image is displayed 4 times, which is the largest number. ing. As such, in this example, the higher the expectation for the jackpot, the less the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, so that the chance-up image is frequently displayed even though the expectation is originally high. Is prevented from becoming annoying. On the contrary, in the case of reach with low expectation for big hit, by increasing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the expectation for reach is low. ..

The configuration shown in the feature unit 097IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown in the feature unit 103SG. For example, a configuration for setting the set value shown in the feature unit 103SG and a configuration for executing a predetermined effect of a specific mode for suggesting the setting are appropriately combined with a configuration for executing the chance-up effect shown in the feature unit 097IW. It is possible to configure.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120, a process table including superreach A to C is selected and steps 097IWS106, S305) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting the above. An image display means capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. (For example, a portion in which the process table including the super reach A to C and the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), and the specific effect execution means is at least the first. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including a specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B), and the image display means is a specific image. At least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, the second specific image (for example) during the execution of the second specific effect). For example, an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3) can be displayed, and a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color), and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-9 to 9-9). As shown in 9-16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means has a first special effect element (for example, blue, green, etc.) when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. A specific image can be displayed by adding a red or iridescent display color effect image), and a second special effect element (for example, white) that is different from the first special effect element when displaying a specific image in a normal mode is displayed. It is possible to display a specific image by adding an effect image of the display color of (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16), and it is controlled to an advantageous state during the execution of the first specific effect. The first specific image can be displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) depending on the degree of expectation, and the first special effect element (for example, the display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image) can be displayed. The first specific image can be displayed by adding (effect images of blue, green, red, and rainbow display colors) (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16), and the movement of the player can be detected. Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold display area). Based on the detection result of 87AKB2, etc.), the promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display) that can execute the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player, and the detection means. An operation effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display) and a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a predetermined effect executing means that can execute a predetermined effect during execution of the variable display). The specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (for example, a display image using a display image 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4) and the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect processing step 87AKS049 during variable display. A specific display can be displayed by any one of 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 (display color, etc.), and the promotion effect executing means includes a plurality of effects including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of the modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3), and the predetermined effect execution means is the "extreme heat" using the predetermined mode (for example, the display image 87AKE3). !! !! The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including the message of the specific display, and the predetermined effect is determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display. A predetermined effect is executed according to the mode (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 11-12), and a promotion effect is executed in a special mode at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 11-). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in 13), the promotion is controlled in an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, promotion according to the variable display result in FIG. 11-13). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the production) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image. In addition, the difference in the mode of the specific image can be emphasized by the display mode of the added first special effect element. In addition, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regarding the promotion effect, the motion effect, and the predetermined effect, a special effect element (for example, an effect image of a display color according to the expectation degree) in a mode corresponding to the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state when the image is displayed in the effect degree. ) May be added to the display, so that the player can be made aware that the promotion effect, the motion effect, or the predetermined effect is a notice effect and the expectation level of the effect is promoted. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production, the motion production, and the predetermined production.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can draw the player's attention to a specific image and appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing to improve the game entertainment, the game is played by performing variable display. A detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit) that is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and that can detect the movement of the player. (35A, etc.), specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKB1, second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.), and promotion of the player's operation. A promotion effect execution means that can execute a promotion effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display) and an operation effect execution means that can execute an operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, an operation effect execution means that can execute the operation effect. For example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process and a predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect during the execution of the variable display (for example, an effect that executes step 87AKS049 of the variable display effect process). The specific display means includes a control CPU 120 and the like, and the specific display means is among a plurality of display modes (for example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4). A specific display can be displayed by any of the above, and the promotion effect executing means is a V corresponding to a plurality of effect modes (for example, display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of (the size of the display, etc.), and the predetermined effect execution means includes a plurality of effects including a predetermined mode (for example, a message of "super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3). A predetermined effect can be executed by any one of the modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3), and the predetermined effect is executed in a different ratio according to the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIG. (Refer to 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in 11-12), the promotion effect is executed in a special mode at a different ratio according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in FIG. 11-13). 87AK51), depending on the production mode of the promotion effect (See, for example, 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIG. 11-13), which is controlled in an advantageous state at different ratios. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Explanation of features related to set values)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds and the type of big hit in the big hit game during the big hit game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

10-1 (A) and 10-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 10-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one using individual display result judgment tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is " The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

10-2 to 10-5 show a numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 10-2 shows a numerical range of hit determination values corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 10-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state. FIG. 10-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 10-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numbers in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numbers in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-1 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold display 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in a state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag is cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It may be possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without this, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 10-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. It may be determined whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is disturbed as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the jackpot reference value to determine the jackpot. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, the value of the random number value MR1 is used when determining whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It may be judged whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature parts 87AK to 89AK)
FIG. 11-1 shows a configuration example 87AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 87AK to 89AK. In the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1, a first hold display area 87AKB1, and a second hold display area 87AKB2 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5. In the active display area 87AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 87AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the first hold storage number. In the second hold display area 87AKB2, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the second hold storage number. As described above, in the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKAB2, active display and hold display which are specific displays based on the information related to the variable display are possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display".

The display area of the first hold display area 87AKB1 may be configured so that, for example, the first hold display is right-justified. In the first hold display area 87AKB1, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the first hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is increased. At this time, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the increased first hold is made at the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first hold display area 87AKB1. As a hold display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new first hold display is added. If there is another 1st hold display in the 1st hold display area 87AKB1, the display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed in the 1st hold display area 87AKB1. In the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"), the effect image showing a new first hold display as the hold display corresponding to the increased first hold storage number. Add a display. When there is one or more first hold displays in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and a new first special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the first hold display area 87AKB1. At the rightmost display part, the first hold display is erased (digested). At this time, if there is a first hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4", those first hold displays are moved to the right side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the first hold display corresponding to the first special figure game whose execution is held without being started is possible according to the number of first hold storages. Further, in the first hold display area 87AKB1, by displaying the effect image to be the hold display image, the first hold display included in the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

The second hold display area 87AKB2 may be configured as a display area so that, for example, the second hold display is left-justified. In the second hold display area 87AKB2, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the second hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, the number of second reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game increases. At this time, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the increased second hold is displayed at the leftmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second hold display area 87AKB2. As a hold display corresponding to the number of stored items, a display of an effect image showing a new second hold display is added. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the display is hidden to the right of the display part where the other second hold display is performed in the second hold display area 87AKB2. A production image showing a new second hold display as a hold display corresponding to the increased second hold storage number at the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). Add a display. When there is one or more second hold displays in the second hold display area 87AKB2 and a new second special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the second hold display area 87AKB2. The second hold display is erased (digested) at the leftmost display site. At this time, if there is a second hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4", those second hold displays are moved to the left side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the second hold display corresponding to the second special figure game whose execution is held without being started is possible according to the second hold storage number. Further, in the second hold display area 87AKB2, by displaying the effect image to be the hold display image, the second hold display included in the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

In the active display area 87AKA1, the active display corresponding to the first hold display deleted (digested) in the first hold display area 87AKAB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game. Further, in the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the second special figure game, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 87AKAB2 is started. In the active display area 87AKA1, by displaying the effect image that becomes the active display image, the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be performed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5 in the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1 is arranged between the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKAB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the arrangement of the active display area 87AKA1 may not be changed, and the first reserved display area 87AKAB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKA2 may be interchanged and arranged.

In the feature units 87AK to 89AK, the advance notice effect of "active display change" is executed as an example of the advance notice effect. The notice effect of the "active display change" changes the display mode of the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the variable display whose execution has started, and the execution starts at a rate according to the display mode after the change. It is announced that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" and will be controlled to the big hit game state. In the notice effect of "active display change", the display color of the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution is a specific color (for example, blue, green, or red) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state. ). It suffices to suggest that the jackpot game state is controlled at a predetermined ratio by changing the display mode that the player can recognize, such as the display color of the active display. In the case of active display using an effect image showing a display pattern, a message, a character, or the like, any display mode may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode. The notice effect of "active display change" is also referred to as change notice or change effect.

The suggestion effect is executed before the advance notice effect of the "active display change" which is the change effect is executed. The suggestion effect suggests that the display mode of the active display changes. After the suggestion effect is executed, the change effect may be executed, or the change effect may not be executed. As described above, after the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may change, or the display mode of the active display may not change. The suggestion effect includes a Gase suggestion effect. Since the change effect is not executed after the Gase suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change. The suggestion effect may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the change effect is executed or not executed and the suggestion effect is not executed. As a result, the player may not be able to determine whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the suggestion effect is completed. The suggestion effect and the change effect are separate effects in that the suggestion effect is executed before the change effect, but the change effect is not executed after the suggestion effect is executed. There is. The suggestion effect may be executed in an effect mode that temporarily changes the display mode of the active display, such as displaying an effect image of the character in the active display area 87AKA1. However, the display mode of the active display changed by the suggestion effect is different from the display mode of the active display changed by the change effect, and the change of the display mode is uncertain. Therefore, for example, whether to return to the white display in the normal state. , It may be impossible or difficult to determine during the execution of the suggestion effect whether the change to the specific color display different from the white display is confirmed.

FIG. 11-2 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. These fluctuation patterns may be prepared in advance so as to be usable in place of a part or all of the fluctuation patterns in the above-described embodiment or together with a part or all of the fluctuation patterns in the above-mentioned embodiment. The plurality of fluctuation patterns differ in the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. The special figure fluctuation time is the time required from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The plurality of fluctuation patterns relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK include fluctuation patterns corresponding to any of non-reach (loss), reach (loss), and jackpot. Non-reach (loss) is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "non-reach loss". Reach (loss) is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination that is not the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss". The jackpot is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to non-reach (loss) is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to reach (loss) is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot is a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. The reach fluctuation pattern and the jackpot fluctuation pattern include a "normal" fluctuation pattern in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, and a super reach after the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed. It includes a variation pattern of "super" in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that develops into the reach effect and becomes the super reach is executed. The reach production that becomes the super reach includes the reach production of Super A and Super B, which have different production modes.

FIG. 11-3 shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern. Examples of determining the variation pattern are the jackpot variation pattern determination example 87AK01 shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 shown in FIG. 11-3 (B1), and FIG. The loss fluctuation pattern determination example (during a short time) 87AK03 shown in B2) is included. The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination example 87AK01 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is “big hit”. Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display becomes “loss” in the normal state where the time reduction control is not performed. Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (during time reduction) 87AK03 corresponds to a case where the display result of the variable display becomes "loss" in the time reduction state in which the time reduction control is performed. In the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" or when the time reduction control is not performed and the time reduction control becomes "missing", the time reduction control is performed. The fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit or loss is determined by using the selected fluctuation pattern determination table depending on the case where “loss” occurs during the time reduction performed. When determining the variation pattern, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the variation pattern is read from the variation random number buffer. The random number buffer for variation can store the extracted random number value when the start winning determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random number value for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation with the determination value preset in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, among the range of the determination values assigned for each variation pattern, the variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random number value for determining the variation pattern. It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the reach mode is adopted in the case of “loss”.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination example 87AK01, the number of determination values assigned to the “super” fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is the “normal” fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PA3-1. Decision values are assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of decision values is greater than the number of decision values assigned to. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 and the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (time reduction medium) 87AK03, the number of determination values assigned to the “normal” fluctuation pattern such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1. Is assigned a determination value to each variation pattern so as to be larger than the number of determination values assigned to the variation patterns of "super" such as variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the reach effect that becomes the super reach is not executed even if the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, and the variable display is displayed. The jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) is higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) In 87AK02, the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the first reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. May be set to include. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special symbol fluctuation time) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the first reserved storage number. When the first reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be shortened as compared with the case where the first reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. A determined value may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time reduction) In 87AK03, the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value is 0, 1, or 2 or more in the second reserved storage number. May be set to include. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the second reserved storage number. When the second reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be shortened as compared with the case where the second reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. A determined value may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern. In the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (medium time reduction) 87AK03, the determination assigned to the variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is long as compared with the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02. A determined value may be assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the number of values increases. As a result, it is sufficient that the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be shortened when the time reduction control is performed during the time reduction, as compared with the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed.

In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in the normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the first reserved storage number is set regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as when the value is a predetermined value (for example, “0”). Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started at normal times and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the special figure game is started regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the first reserved storage number at the time point. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the loss fluctuation pattern determination example regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of 87AK02 (normal time). Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in the normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss", the "first hold" in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by replacing "the number of stored items" with "the number of stored items on hold" and referring to the table data corresponding to the number of stored items on hold.

During the time reduction when the time reduction control is performed, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving, the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the second reserved storage number is irrespective of the first reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as when is a predetermined value (for example, “0”). Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of the loss variation pattern determination example (in the time saving) 87AK03 regardless of the number of first reserved storages. Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time reduction and the display result of the variable display becomes "loss", the "second" in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (time reduction) 87AK03. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by replacing "the number of reserved storages" with "the first number of reserved storages" and referring to the table data corresponding to the first number of reserved storages.

11-4 (A1) to (A4) show an example of active display relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The active display can be displayed in different display modes such as display colors. In this active display example, four display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for active display. The number of display images that can be used for active display is not limited to four, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKC1 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in white. The display image 87AKC2 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in blue. The display image 87AKC3 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in green. The display image 87AKC4 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in red. In the active display, as a normal display mode, a white display of a character indicating a coin is performed by the display image 87AKC1. The change effect includes a case where the display color of the active display is blue, green, or red. Of these, when the display color is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display color is blue or green. When the display color is green, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display color is blue. As described above, the active display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes such as white display, blue display, green display, and red display. Further, the active display can be displayed in a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4. The active display may be displayed in a different display mode together with the display color or in place of the display color depending on the type, size, shape, pattern, and other display modes of any effect image.

11-4 (B1) to (B3) show examples of suggestive effects relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The suggestion effect can be executed with different effect modes including the display mode, such as a character. In this suggestion effect example, three display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the suggestion effect. The number of display images that can be used for the suggestion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKD1 is an effect image in the case where the character showing the coin explodes in the active display. The display image 87AKD2 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin emits light in the active display. The display image 87AKD3 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin is rotated in the active display. In the suggestion effect, the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed by executing the change effect differs depending on the execution timing and the effect mode. In addition, the ratio of which of the plurality of display modes the active display display mode changes after the execution of the change effect differs depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. As described above, the suggestion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as an effect mode in which any of the displayed images 87 AKD 1 to 87 AKD 3 is displayed.

11-5 (A1) to (A3) show an example of a cut-in effect relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The cut-in effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during execution of the reach effect that becomes the super reach after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. In the cut-in effect, for example, an effect image of a character that notifies a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The cut-in effect is a ratio according to whether or not it was executed along with the reach effect that becomes super reach, and a ratio according to the effect mode when it is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state. Foretell that it will be controlled by. The cut-in effect is the content of the message by the character, the type of character, size, shape, pattern, color, type of frame to be the outer frame, size, shape, pattern, color, type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, It suffices if it can be executed in a different production mode depending on the color and other display modes of any production image.

In the cut-in effect example of FIGS. 11-5 (A1) to (A3), three display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the cut-in effect. The number of display images that can be used for the cut-in effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKE1 is an effect image when displaying a character for notifying the message of "???". The display image 87AKE2 is an effect image when displaying a character that notifies the message of "chance !!". The display image 87AKE3 is an effect image when displaying a character that notifies the message of "super heat !!". The ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the ratio of notifying the message of "extreme heat !!" differ depending on the display mode of the active display. As described above, the cut-in effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as a message effect mode in which the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is displayed to notify the user. Further, the cut-in effect can be executed by a predetermined mode such as an effect mode for notifying the message of "super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3.

11-5 (B1) to (B3) show examples of promotion effects related to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The promotion effect can be executed at the final stage of the reach effect, which is the super reach. By executing the promotion effect, the player's movements such as the movement of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, are promoted. The tilting operation for tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A may include a pulling operation for tilting the operation stick toward the front side. In the promotion effect, for example, an effect image that is a V-con image imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Along with the V-con image, a meter image notifying the remaining period for effectively detecting the movement of the player may be displayed. Along with the V-con image, a character image for notifying the message "Close !!" may be displayed. By displaying such a V-con image, a meter image, a character image, or an effect image including a part or all of these, the operation of the player who is the pulling operation of the V controller may be promoted. In the promotion effect, the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes is different depends on whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit game state. The promotion effect may be executed in a different effect mode depending on the size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of the arbitrary effect image for the V-con image, meter image, and character image.

In the promotion effect example of FIGS. 11-5 (B1) to (B3), three display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect. The number of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKF1 is an effect image in the case of a small V-con display that displays a small-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF2 is an effect image in the case of a medium V-con display for displaying a medium-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF3 is an effect image in the case of a large V-con display that displays a large-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. For the promotion effect, the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence / absence of the cut-in effect and the effect mode, or the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence / absence of the change effect and the execution timing. Alternatively, the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect and the effect mode. In the reach effect that is the super reach, when the movement of the player that is the pulling operation of the V controller is detected in response to the promotion effect, the final notification effect that is the operation effect is executed. As described above, the promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as an effect mode according to the size of the V-con display displaying any of the displayed images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. Further, the promotion effect can be executed by a special mode such as a large V-con display effect mode using the display image 87AKF3.

FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol and the like are determined (step 87AKS021). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly generated by setting the command transmission at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random number value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is ". It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". Become. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probability change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table previously stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. In the jackpot promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then during the jackpot game state or the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probability change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", in step 126AKS011, it is decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may be broken. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognizablely notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In addition, after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in step 126AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined in step 87AKS021, the effect determination process is executed (step 87AKS022). In the effect determination process, it is sufficient that the final display image, which is the final display mode of the active display, the change pattern used for the change effect, the suggestion effect, the cut-in effect, the promotion effect, and the like can be determined. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 87AKS023). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses it as a usage pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns and set them as usage patterns in response to the execution settings of various effects by the effect determination process in step 87AKS022. For a plurality of effect control patterns, a change effect control pattern for executing a change effect, a suggestion effect control pattern for executing a suggestion effect, a cut-in effect control pattern for executing a cut-in effect, and a promotion effect are executed. The promotion effect control pattern for the purpose may be included. As the effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effects, a plurality of effect control patterns may be individually determined, or a single effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the execution settings of various effects. The effect control pattern may be determined all at once.

When the effect control pattern is determined by step 87AKS023, for example, the initial effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step 87AKS024). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 87AKS025). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After setting the variable start in step 87AKS025, the hold display such as the first hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and the second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2 corresponds to the start of the variable display. And so on (step 87AKS026). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the display part (display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested). , The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested). , The second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. The stored contents of the hold display data storage unit may be shifted in accordance with the shift of the hold display. In addition, settings for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 are made in response to the deleted hold display. As a result, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start the display of the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area 87AKA1.

If both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "0" and the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize or the second starting winning prize, the first is The setting for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 may be made without updating the 1 hold display or the second hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display, which is a round plain and white display, in the active display area 87AKA1 as a normal display mode in the active display. After updating the hold display or the like in step 87AKS026, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step 87AKS027), and then the variable display start setting process ends. ..

FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process as the effect determination process. In the effect determination process, the final display image of the active display is determined (step 87AKS101). The final display image of the active display is an effect image that is finally displayed as the active display. In step 87AKS101, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 in accordance with the case where the display mode of the active display is not changed or is changed. After that, the change pattern of the active display is determined (step 87AKS102). The change pattern of the active display is used for a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display. The change pattern of the active display is an effect pattern in which the effect mode of the change effect can be specified, and a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121. In step 87AKS102, in order to determine the change pattern of the active display, it is determined whether or not there is a change effect. Whether or not there is a change effect is either "with change" or "no change" in which the change effect is executed, depending on the comparison result between the pre-change image, which is the display mode when the active display is started, and the final display image. Is decided on. For example, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if they are different display images, it is determined that there is a change effect to execute the change effect. When the variable display is started without the pre-change image and the final display image matching, the display of the active display effect image is changed directly or stepwise to the final display image by executing the change effect. Just do it. When the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it may be determined as "no change" in which the change effect is not executed. When it is determined that there is no change in which the change effect is not executed, it may be determined without the change pattern of the active display. When it is determined that there is a change to execute the change effect, it is possible to determine a single or a plurality of change patterns corresponding to a plurality of timings at which the change effect can be executed.

Following step 87AKS102, the suggestion effect is determined (step 87AKS103). In step 87AKS103, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 according to the timing at which the change effect is executed. Further, even at the timing when the change effect is not executed, if the Gase suggestion effect is executed, it can be determined to be one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Next, as a reach effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a super that executes the reach effect in the super reach (step 87AKS104). At this time, if the reach effect in the super reach is not executed and it is determined that there is no super (step 87AKS104; No), the effect determination process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a supermarket (step 87AKS104; Yes), the cut-in effect is determined (step 87AKS105), the promotion effect is determined (step 87AKS106), and then the effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 11-8 shows a determination example of the final display image. In step 87AKS101 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the final display image is extracted, and the final display image is determined by referring to the final display image determination table according to the variable display content based on the random number value. Just do it. As a determination example of the final display image, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK11 is determined by the determination ratio according to the variable display content as shown in FIG. 11-8. The determination example 87AK11 includes the cases of "non-reach (loss)", "normal (loss)", "super (loss)", and "big hit" as the variable display contents for determining the final display image. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the reach effect is not executed due to the non-reach fluctuation pattern among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "loss". When the variable display content is "normal (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "normal". There is. When the variable display content is "super (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "super". ing. When the variable display content is "big hit", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit".

In the determination example 87AK11 shown in FIG. 11-8, the determination ratios of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images, differ depending on whether or not the variable display content is “big hit” and is controlled to the big hit game state. For example, the display image 87AKC1 is determined at the highest ratio when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", and the variable display content is "super (loss)" or "big hit". If, the decision rate is low. On the other hand, in the display image 87AKC4, when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", the determination ratio cannot be determined at 0/100 (= 0%), and the variable display is variable. When the content is "big hit", the decision rate is the highest. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the variable display content, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKC4, but higher than that of the display images 87AKC2 and 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display images 87AKC4 and 87AKC3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. As described above, it may be possible to suggest that the active display is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at different ratios depending on the display mode such as the display color.

FIG. 11-9 shows a configuration example of the change pattern used for the change effect and the executable timing of the change effect. In the configuration example of the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 are prepared in advance as a plurality of change patterns that can be used for the change effect. The plurality of change patterns correspond to the combination of the active display display image (pre-change image) before the change effect is executed and the active display display image (post-change image) after the change effect is executed. For example, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC2 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-2 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-3 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-4 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC2 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-5 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC2 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-6 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC3 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change effect can be executed at a single timing or at a plurality of timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed according to the fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 11-9 (B1) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed in the case of non-reach (loss) corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. In the case of non-reach (loss), the change effect can be executed at the timing before the reach is established, which is the first timing. As described above, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is not in the reach mode, it is possible to execute the change effect at a single timing while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

FIG. 11-9 (B2) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed corresponding to the “normal” fluctuation pattern. When the reach effect that is the normal reach is executed, the change effect can be executed before the reach is established, which is the first timing, or after the reach is established. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the timing of two times while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

FIG. 11-9 (B3) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed corresponding to the variation pattern of the “super”. When the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the timing of the first timing before the reach is established, after the reach is established, at the time of super development, and at the timing of the second timing of the cut-in effect. Is. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode and the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at four timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. The first timing and the second timing may be any timing as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. Further, the present invention is not limited to these timings, and it is sufficient that the change effect can be executed at a single or a plurality of timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. In the active display area 87AKA1, the display of the effect image to be the active display is started in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. After the active display is started in this way, the cut-in effect can be executed before the operation effect is executed in the reach effect that becomes the super reach.

FIG. 11-10 shows an example of determining the change pattern. In step 87AKS102 of the effect determination process, a single or a plurality of random values for determining the change pattern are extracted, and based on the random values, the change pattern determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display. The change pattern corresponding to the timing may be determined. The change pattern determination examples include a "no super" determination example corresponding to a fluctuation pattern other than the "super" fluctuation pattern and a "super presence" determination example corresponding to a "super" fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the determination example is included.

FIG. 11-10 (A) shows 87AK21, which is a determination example of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established, as a determination example of “no supermarket”. In the determination example 87AK21, the presence / absence and type of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. If it is determined without a change pattern, the change effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the white display, which is the normal mode as the display mode of the active display, does not change, so 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to the fact that the change effect is not executed. Determined at the rate of no change pattern. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is a normal mode, to the blue display as the display mode of the active display. It is decided to be 87AKP1-1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the change pattern is at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the green display as the display mode of the active display. It is decided to be 87AKP1-2. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the change pattern is at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the red display as the display mode of the active display. Determined to be 87AKP1-3.

FIG. 11-10 (B) shows a determination example 87AK22 of a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established and the second timing during the cut-in effect as a determination example of “with supermarket”. There is. In the determination example 87AK22, the presence / absence and type of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing and the second timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the white display, which is the normal mode as the display mode of the active display, does not change, so 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to the fact that the change effect is not executed. The ratio is determined without the change pattern of the first timing and the second timing. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the white display, which is the normal mode, is changed to the red display as the display mode of the active display. In this case, the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-5 is determined at a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), and is 30/100 (= 30%). The combination of the change pattern 87AKP1-2 of the first timing and the change pattern 87AKP1-6 of the second timing is determined at the ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), and there is no change pattern of the first timing and the second. The combination with the timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 is determined, and the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 with no second timing change pattern is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%). In this way, the presence / absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to the timing are determined at different ratios depending on the display mode of the active display. Further, it is sufficient that it is possible to suggest the final display mode of the active display at a different ratio depending on the presence / absence of the change effect and the change pattern in response to a single or a plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display.

In the determination example 87AK21, the determination ratio of the change pattern 87AKP1-1 of the second timing is 0/100 (= 0%). As a result, at the second timing, the active display does not change from the white display in the normal mode to the blue display. Since the second timing is the cut-in effect during the reach effect that becomes the super reach, the expectation that the player is controlled by the jackpot game state is increasing. If the display changes to blue with low expectation at such a timing, it suggests that it is unlikely to be controlled by the jackpot game state, and there is a risk that the player will be awakened by giving discomfort. There is. Therefore, at the second timing, it is set not to execute the change effect in which the active display changes from the white display to the blue display. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big hit game state is increasing, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being lowered due to the discomfort of the change effect suggesting that the expectation is low.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK21, when the first timing is determined by the change pattern PA1-3, the second timing is determined without the change pattern, so that the change effect is not executed at the second timing. Since the change pattern PA1-3 changes the active display from the white display of the display image 87AKC1 to the red display of the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display cannot be further changed. In this way, before the cut-in effect that is the second timing, the change effect is not executed at the second timing in response to the case where the display mode of the active display is the red display that is the specific mode. The display mode of the display is not changed. Further, when the change effect is executed at the first timing before the second timing, the display mode of the active display can be changed to the red display, so that the degree of freedom of the change pattern in the change effect is increased. , Various productions can be performed. Even if the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode such as red display at the first timing, if a special effect such as a promotion effect is executed as a cut-in effect, the active display is displayed at the second timing. The display mode of the active display may be further changed at the second timing, such as changing the display mode of the above to a gold display.

FIG. 11-11 shows a determination example of the suggestion effect including the Gase suggestion effect. In step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, if it is determined whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect, which is whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect, in response to the timing when the change effect is not executed among the first timing and the second timing. Good. At this time, for example, a random number value for determining the execution of the Gase suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the Gase suggestion effect is executed by referring to the Gase suggestion effect execution decision table according to the timing when the change effect is not executed. The presence or absence may be determined. As an execution decision example of the Gase suggestion effect, there may be a case where the decision example 87AK31 is determined by the decision ratio according to the first timing and the second timing as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A). Further, in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random number value, the suggestion effect determination table is referred to according to the change pattern used in the change effect. Alternatively, the effect image to be used for the suggestion effect corresponding to a plurality of timings may be determined. As a determination example of the suggestion effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK32 is determined by the determination ratio according to the change pattern as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B).

In the determination example 87AK31 shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), it is determined as either “with execution” or “without execution” to execute the Gase suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing and the second timing. .. However, in the case of "no super", the variable display ends before the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, is reached, so it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing. In the determination example 87AK31, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect differs depending on whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, in the first timing, it is determined as "executed" at a rate of 10/100 (= 10%) and "without execution" at a rate of 90/100 (= 90%). In the second timing, the ratio of 0/100 (= 0%) is determined to be "executed", and the ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) is determined to be "not executed". As a result, there is a limitation as a limit that the Gase suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined ratio in the range of the first timing, but the Gase suggestion effect is not executed in the range of the second timing after the first timing. It should be noted that the second timing is not limited to the restriction that the Gase suggestion effect is not executed, and the second timing may be limited to the execution ratio of the Gase suggestion effect being lower than that of the first timing. By providing these restrictions, in the second timing in which the expectation of being controlled by the jackpot game state is increasing, the event that the change effect is not executed even if the suggestion effect is executed is stopped or reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the discomfort of the Gase suggestion effect at the timing when the expectation for the big hit game state is increasing.

The determination example 87AK32 shown in FIG. 11-11 (B) includes a case where the determination ratios of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 used for the suggestion effect differ depending on the change pattern used in the change effect. For example, when there is no change pattern corresponding to the Gase suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Yes, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 0/100 (= 0%). In this case, the display image 87 AKD3 is not determined. Therefore, when the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed by always executing the change effect without executing the Gase suggestion effect. In the case of any of the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 30/100. (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 60/100 (= 60%). In the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the changed image is the display image 87AKC4, and the display mode of the active display is changed to the red display. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the change pattern, when the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is the highest. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD2 is executed, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is lower than that of the display image 87AKD3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKD1. It gets higher. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is the lowest. As described above, the suggestion effect may suggest that the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like. Further, the suggestion effect may be able to suggest whether or not the display mode of the active display changes at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image.

FIG. 11-12 shows a determination example of the cut-in effect. In step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining the cut-in effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the cut-in effect determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display, thereby performing the cut-in effect. It suffices to decide whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and whether or not to execute the effect image to be used. As a determination example of the cut-in effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK41 is based on the determination ratio according to the final display image in the active display as shown in FIGS. 11-12. In the determination example 87AK41, the presence / absence and type of the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined according to the final display image in the active display. If it is determined that there is no display image used for the cut-in effect, the cut-in effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (= 80%) without the display image and at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%). In this case, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the cut-in effect using these display images is not executed. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, it is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%) without the display image, and at a ratio of 40/100 (= 40%), it is determined to be the display image 87AKE1. The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of / 100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%). When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, it is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%) without the display image, and at a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), it is determined to be the display image 87AKE1. The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of / 100 (= 40%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%).

In the determination example 87AK41, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE1 without the display image is 0/100 (= 0%), and the ratio of 20/100 (= 20%). The display image 87AKE2 is determined by, and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (= 80%). In this case, the cut-in effect is always executed, and either the display image 87AKE2 or 87AKE3 is used. As described above, the presence / absence of the cut-in effect and the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined at different ratios depending on the display mode of the active display. Further, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the final display mode in the active display differs depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, for example, when the change effect is executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing, it is possible to suggest the final display mode of the active display at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the cut-in effect. In addition, when the change effect is not executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the cut-in effect at a different ratio depending on the display mode of the active display.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK41, the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is not determined because the determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1 and is displayed. It can be determined when any of the images 87AKC2 to 87AKC4. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the predetermined mode by the display of the display image 87AKE3, the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed. Become.

The cut-in effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the change pattern at the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing. For example, when the change effect is not executed at the second timing, the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect may be determined at a high rate. According to such a setting of the determination ratio, when the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE1 is executed, the ratio that the change effect is not executed at the second timing becomes high, and the display mode of the active display is hard to change. Become. As described above, the effect mode of the cut-in effect may include an effect mode in which the execution rate of the change effect is low and the display mode of the active display is unlikely to change.

11-13 to 11-15 show a determination example of the promotion effect corresponding to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the promotion effect is extracted, and based on the random number value, the promotion effect determination table is referred to according to the display result of the variable display and used for the promotion effect. The production image may be determined. As a determination example of the promotion effect, when the determination example 87AK51 regarding the feature portion 87AK shown in FIG. 11-13 is used, and when the determination example 88AK01 regarding the feature portion 88AK shown in FIG. 11-14 is used, the feature portion 89AK shown in FIG. Of the cases where the determination example 89AK01 is obtained, at least one of the cases may be obtained. Depending on the success or failure of a specific condition relating to the progress of the game or the production, or depending on the success or failure of the special condition not related to the progress of the game or the production, each determination example may be switched. For example, if the number of executions of the variable display is within the specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if it is outside the specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01. .. Further, if the effect mode is the normal mode, the promotion effect is determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if the special mode is different from the normal mode, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01. ..

In the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 87AK shown in FIG. 11-13, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the cut-in effect are performed. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image used for. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (= 40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (= 80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is “missing”, the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the cut-in effect, when the display image is 87AKE1 and when the display image is 87AKE2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss" and is used for the promotion effect. The determination rate of image 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. .. By setting the determination ratio in this way, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player misses the cut-in effect, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled to some extent depends on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is due to the display of the display image 87AKF3. Can be determined up to.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 87AK51, when there is no display image corresponding to the case where the cut-in effect is not executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is performed at a higher ratio than when the cut-in effect is executed. Will be executed. When the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Further, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, even if the display result of the variable display is the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. The proportions are different. For example, among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when there is no display image in which the cut-in effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 are displayed, and the display image 87AKF2 is displayed as the effect mode of the promotion effect. The ratio of display becomes high. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" are compared, in this case, there is no display image of the cut-in effect, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3. As an effect mode of the promotion effect, the ratio of displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect mode and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the cut-in effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

In 88AK01, which is a determination example of the promotion effect related to the feature portion 88AK shown in FIG. 11-14, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the active display are determined. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the final display image. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", there is no execution of the change effect, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%). ), The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%). The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). Regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is "missing" or "big hit", if the change effect is not executed and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKF1, The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 70/100 (= 70%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). is there. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is It is 40/100 (= 40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 80/100 (= 80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 30/100 (= 30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 70/100 (= 70%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). is there. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 50/100 (= 50%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 30/100 (= 30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. , The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10). %). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 95/100 (= 95%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 5/100 (= 5%). .. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). ..

In the determination example of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. The highest. For example, when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" regardless of whether the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2 or other than the display image 87AKC2. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for the promotion effect is the highest. In addition, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or at the first timing and the second timing, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" regardless of the final display image of the active display. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. The ratio is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the change effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player cannot determine the timing of the change effect, it is expected that the effect mode of the promotion effect will be controlled to the jackpot game state depending on whether or not the display image 87AKF3 is displayed. The degree can be determined to some extent.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 88AK01, when the change effect is not executed or when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the change effect is executed only at the second timing or the first timing. And the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than the case where the change effect is executed at the second timing. When the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at a different ratio depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. Further, in the change effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the presence / absence of execution and the timing. Therefore, it is possible to suggest an effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display results of the variable display are the same, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. May occur. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%) or 50/100 (= 50). %). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%) or 20/100. (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%) or It is 95/100 (= 95%). Even when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 differs depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. When the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the display image 87AKF3 is not determined. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display image 87AKF3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence and timing of execution of the change effect and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the change effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions. Further, the timing at which the change effect is executed differs, such as whether or not the change effect is executed at the second timing, depending on whether or not the promotion effect is executed in a special mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. ..

In addition, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the execution presence / absence and timing of the change effect are the same in addition to the display result of the variable display, the display image used for the promotion effect depends on the final display image of the active display. 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 may be determined at different ratios. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is not executed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1. ), On the other hand, it is 50/100 (= 50%) in the case other than the display image 87AKC1. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 70/100 (when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2). = 70%), whereas it is 80/100 (= 80%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC2. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3). = 30%), whereas it is 20/100 (= 20%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC3. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10 when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. While it is / 100 (= 10%), it is 5/100 (= 5%) when the display image is other than 87AKC4. Even when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of determining the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 differs depending on the final display image of the active display even if the execution presence / absence and timing of the change effect are the same. .. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the display mode of the active display and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the active display and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

In the decision example 89AK01 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 89AK shown in FIG. 11-15, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, it is used for whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and for the suggestion effect. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image to be displayed. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (= 40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. It is / 100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. It is / 100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30. It is / 100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10. It is / 100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (= 80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90. It is / 100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is “missing”, the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the suggestion effect, when the display image is 87AKD1, and when the display image is 87AKD2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss" and is used for the promotion effect. The decision rate of 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. By setting the determination ratio in this way, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player misses the suggestive effect, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled to a certain extent is increased depending on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is due to the display of the display image 87AKF3. Can be determined.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 89AK01, when there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the suggestion effect is executed. To. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. Further, in the suggestion effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, even if the display results of the variable display are the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. Is different. For example, among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when there is no display image that does not execute the suggestion effect, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the display image 87AKF2 is displayed as the effect mode of the promotion effect as the suggestive effect is not displayed, the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3. The ratio becomes high. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" are compared, in this case, the display image is not displayed, the display image is 87AKD1, the display image is 87AKD2, and the display image is 87AKD3. As an effect mode of the effect, the ratio of displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect and the effect mode and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the suggestion effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

FIG. 11-16 shows a determination example of the promotion effect as a modification. For example, in the case of the cut-in effect display image 87AKE3 in the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect relating to the feature portion 87AK, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are used at a ratio corresponding to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may decide on either. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, FIG. 11-16 shows an example of determining the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be the determination example 87AK61 shown.

In the decision example 87AK61 of the promotion effect shown in FIG. 11-16, when the display result of the variable display is “missing” among the display images 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 90%). = 10%). On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image used for the promotion effect is according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratios of 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are different. In such a case, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same, while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1. ), If the set value is 2, it is 30/100 (= 30%), if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), and if the set value is 4, it is 20/100. (= 20%), if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it is 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK61, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is set as the pachinko game. It is made different according to the set value in the machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode by the display of the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect is the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the display mode is increased. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the display of the display image 87AKE3, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Expectation, which is a set value, increases.

The effect mode of the promotion effect is an effect mode as a predetermined mode for notifying the message of "super heat !!" by displaying the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to such a predetermined mode can be grasped by repeatedly executing the cut-in effect and the promotion effect with a plurality of variable displays in which the display result is a "big hit". In the variable display in which the display result is a "big hit", the player can set the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by grasping the ratio in which the promotion effect is a predetermined mode when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed. Can be recognized. If the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage, the display result of the variable display tends to be a “big hit” and is easily controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, a player who expects to add a game value such as winning a prize ball expects that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high degree of advantage, and therefore the display result becomes a "big hit" a plurality of times. In the variable display of, the motivation to play is enhanced by making the set value recognizable from the ratio in which the promotion effect is a predetermined mode.

Even when there is no display image used for the cut-in effect, or when the display image is either 87AKE1 or 87AKE2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are used according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" becomes high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value.

Of 88AK01, which is a determination example of the promotion effect related to the feature unit 88AK, for example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Depending on the situation, the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different. For example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "missing", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10. / 100 (= 10%). On the other hand, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same, while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and the set value is 2. If there is, it is 30/100 (= 30%), if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), and if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%). If the value is 5, it may be 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (= 90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode displayed by the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the promotion effect is produced. The ratio in which the effect mode is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 becomes high. Therefore, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 by executing the change effect at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. , The expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player is high. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the change effect and the promotion effect along with the variable display of the display result as a "big hit" a plurality of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since the set value in the above can be recognized, the player's motivation to play is enhanced.

In addition, among the cases where the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, even when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the promotion effect is performed according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the above may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" becomes high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value. In addition, even when the change effect is not executed, or when it is executed only at the first timing or only at the second timing, the display images 87AKF1 to be used for the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of 87AKF3 may be different.

Of the 89AK01 determination examples of the promotion effect related to the feature portion 89AK, for example, in the case of the suggestion effect display image 87AKD3, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be different. For example, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (regardless of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1). = 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). On the other hand, among the cases where the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect is, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same. The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2, and the set value is 3. If, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%). If the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (= 90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode displayed by the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the promotion effect is produced. The ratio in which the effect mode is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 becomes high. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is the display of the display image 87AKD3, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Expectation, which is a value, increases. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the suggestion effect and the promotion effect along with the variable display of the display result as a "big hit" a plurality of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since the set value in the above can be recognized, the player's motivation to play is enhanced.

Even when there is no display image used for the suggestion effect, or when the display image is either 87AKD1 or 87AKD2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect depend on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The decision ratio may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" becomes high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value.

The determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 which is the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence / absence of the suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, Of the presence / absence of the cut-in effect, the determination rate of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determination rate of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing". In this case, it may be set differently according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is highly advantageous for the player in the ratio determined to the production mode with high expectation that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It may be set to be higher as the set value is reached. According to such a setting, after the high expectation effect, which is the effect of the effect mode with high expectation, is executed, the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 has It is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is a set value having a high degree of advantage. In general, when the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" after the high expectation effect of the effect mode with high expectation is executed, the player's expectation once raised by the effect is variably displayed. Since the display result of is rapidly reduced, the player is likely to lose or lose the motivation to continue the game. On the other hand, as the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases after the high expectation effect is executed, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value is increased. By increasing the value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game so that the player is motivated to continue the game.

It should be noted that the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 which is the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence / absence of the suggestion effect, and the determination of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Of the ratio, the presence / absence of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing". In this case, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be set differently depending on whether the set value is equal to or more than the specific set value or less than the specific set value. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 or more, it is more likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "missing" than when it is less than 4. The decision rate may be increased. Alternatively, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is controlled to the jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "missing" than when it is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5). The rate of determining the production mode with a high degree of expectation may be increased. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5), the determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%) when the display result of the variable display is "missing", which is a big hit. Regarding the effect mode to be finalized, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, if the display result of the variable display is “missing”, it may be set so as to be determinable at a predetermined ratio. According to this setting, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5), the effect of the effect mode in which the big hit is confirmed is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing". In that case, since the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be 6, it is possible to improve the gaming interest so that the player can be motivated to continue the game.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special conditions are satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. Further, the arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display in-effect processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step 87AKS041). In step 87AKS041, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display is performed. It may be determined that the time has passed. As described above, the passage of the variable display time may be determined as the passage of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like.

When the variable display time has not elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not it is the suggestion effect period for executing the suggestion effect (step 87AKS042). The suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (suggestion effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the suggestion effect period (step 87AKS042; Yes), control for executing the suggestion effect is performed (step 87AKS043). In step 87AKS043, for example, various commands created based on the setting of the suggestion effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, blinking or extinguished. It suffices that the suggestion effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by the above, or by combining a part or all of them.

When it is determined in step 87AKS042 that it is not the suggested effect period (step 87AKS042; No), or after the control in step 87AKS043 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect. (Step 87AKS044). The change effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (change effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the change effect period (step 87AKS044; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 87AKS045). As the change effect period, for example, a period before the reach is established, which is the first timing, and a period at the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, may be set in advance. At the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the display mode of the active display may be changed by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the execution of the cut-in effect.

When it is determined in step 87AKS044 that it is not the change effect period (step 87AKS044; No), or after the control in step 87AKS045 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. (Step 87AKS046). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the reach effect period (step 87AKS046; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (step 87AKS047).

Whether or not it is the cut-in effect period for executing the cut-in effect when it is determined in step 87AKS046 that it is not the reach effect period (step 87AKS046; No) or after the control in step 87AKS047 is executed. Is determined (step 87AKS048). The cut-in effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; Yes), control for executing the cut-in effect is performed (step 87AKS049). The cut-in effect period is before the operation effect period is determined in step 87AKS052 after the display of the effect image that becomes the active display is started by step 87AKS026 of the variable display start setting process. In addition, it may be set in advance so that the cut-in effect can be executed. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the cut-in effect can be executed after the active display is displayed and before the operation effect is executed.

The order of active display, motion effect, and cut-in effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the active display may be started after the cut-in effect is executed, and then the motion effect may be executed. Alternatively, the operation effect may be executed after the active display is started, and then the cut-in effect may be executed.

When it is determined in step 87AKS048 that it is not the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; No), or after the control in step 87AKS049 is executed, whether or not it is the promotion effect period for executing the promotion effect is determined. Determine (step 87AKS050). The promotion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; Yes), control for executing the promotion effect is performed (step 87AKS051). The promotion effect period may be an effective detection period for effectively detecting the movement of the player as the promotion effect is executed. In the effective detection period, for example, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A, the movement of the player who tilts the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, such as the pulling operation for the V controller, may be detected.

When it is determined in step 87AKS050 that it is not the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; No), or after the control in step 87AKS051 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the operation effect period for executing the operation effect. (Step 87AKS052). The operation effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the effective detection period after the promotion effect is started, if a specific operation by the player, such as an operation of pulling the operation stick of the stick controller 31A serving as the V controller, is not detected, the operation effect period is set. It may not be started. Alternatively, even if the specific operation is not detected, the operation effect period may be started when the specific timing for the operation effect is reached. In the case of the operation effect period (step 87AKS052; Yes), control for executing the operation effect is performed (step 87AKS053).

The specific action of the player to be detected in order to execute the motion effect may be an action of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, unlike a pulling operation such as a pushing operation with respect to the V controller. Alternatively, the specific operation of the player may be an operation of pressing the push button 31B. The movement of the player is not limited to the one that can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, any effect corresponding to the motion effect may be executed. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using the camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected and the effect may be executed based on the detection result.

When it is determined in step 87AKS052 that it is not the operation effect period (step 87AKS052; No), or after the control in step 87AKS053 is executed, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Based on this, control for executing other effects during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, is performed (step 87AKS054), and the variable display effect process ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 87AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 87AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step 87AKS055 (step 87AKS055; Yes), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step 87AKS056). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 87AKS057). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step 87AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

11-18 to 11-22 show examples of variable display of decorative patterns and execution of various effects. FIG. 11-18 shows an execution example from the start of fluctuation, which is the start of variable display, to the execution of the suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established. FIG. 11-19 shows a case other than the variable end or non-reach (loss), in which the variable display ends in the case of non-reach (loss) after the change effect corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established is executed. An execution example of reach establishment in which the variable display is the reach mode is shown. FIG. 11-20 corresponds to an execution example of the variable end, which is the end of the variable display in the case of normal (loss), and the second timing at the time of the cut-in effect from the super development where the reach effect, which is the super reach, is started. An execution example until the suggestion effect is executed is shown. FIG. 11-21 shows an execution example in which the promotion effect is executed after the change effect corresponding to the second timing at the time of the cut-in effect is executed. FIG. 11-22 shows an execution example from the execution of the operation effect to the end of the variable display, which is the end of the variable display.

In the effect determination process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process in response to the variable start of the effect execution example 87AKM01 shown in FIG. 11-18 (A), the final display image in the active display. The change pattern of the change effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the operation mode of the promotion effect, and the like are determined. After the start of the fluctuation in the effect execution example 87AKM01, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes can be executed in response to the establishment of the reach, which is the first timing. FIG. 11-18 (B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM11 when a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 11-18 (B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM12 in the case where the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 11-18 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM13 in the case where the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. As described above, the suggestion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes depending on which of the displayed images 87 AKD 1 to 87 AKD 3 is used. Of the cases where the change effect is not executed in response to the first timing, if it is determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process that the Gase suggestion effect is not executed, the suggestion effect is not executed. The variable display of the decorative pattern progresses. After the suggestion effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is executed before the reach is established, which is the first timing, the change effect may or may not be executed. Of these, when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the first timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 11-19 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM21 in the case where the change effect is not executed corresponding to the absence of the change pattern of the first timing. Since the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM21, the display mode of the active display remains white and does not change. In this case, the suggestion effect in any one of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is a Gase suggestion effect that is executed when there is no change effect. However, in the determination example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), if the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM13 is executed, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1- Since it has been decided to be one of 6, it will not be a suggestion effect.

FIG. 11-19 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM22 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM22, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 11-19 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM23 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM23, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 11-19 (A4) shows an effect execution example 87AKM24 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM24, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display mode of the active display changes to blue because the display image 87AKC2 such as the effect execution example 87AKM22 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the display mode of the active display changes to green because the display image 87AKC3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM23 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display mode of the active display changes to red because the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM24 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1.

In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display based on the non-reach fluctuation pattern, for example, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM31 shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1) is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display is variable. The display result of the display is derived and ends. In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the variation pattern other than the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode as in the effect execution example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), for example. , Reach is established. After the reach is established, there are cases where the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed and the variable display ends, and there are cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed and the super development occurs.

FIG. 11-20 (A1) shows an example 87AKM41 of a variable end effect in which the variable display ends when the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed when the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed. .. FIG. 11-20 (A2) shows a production execution example 87AKM42 of super development in which a reach effect of normal reach develops into a reach effect of super reach. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed as in the effect execution example 87AKM42, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" may be reduced and displayed. .. Further, a small symbol display area may be arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion on the screen of the image display device 5. There is. In the small symbol display area, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. It may be a reduced identification information image. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. In this way, in the small symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol that serves as the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the definite small symbol that is the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small design may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times. In the small symbol display area, by displaying the small symbol in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misidentifying the display content and display result of the small symbol.

Following the super development in the production execution example 87AKM42, the reach production that becomes the super reach may proceed as in the production execution example 87AKM43 shown in FIG. 11-20 (B). After the reach effect in the effect execution example 87AKM43, the display mode of the active display changes with the execution of the cut-in effect or without the execution of the cut-in effect in response to the cut-in effect which is the second timing. Suggestion effects that suggest the above become feasible. FIG. 11-20 (C1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM51 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87 AKD1 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect is not executed. By determining without the display image used for the cut-in effect in step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, even if the cut-in effect is not executed, the suggestion effect corresponding to the second timing is displayed in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process. When the image is determined, the suggestion effect can be executed even if the cut-in effect is not executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing. FIG. 11-20 (C2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM52 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect by displaying the display image 87AKE2 is executed. ing. FIG. 11-20 (C3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM53 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect by displaying the display image 87AKE3 is executed. ing. The change effect is executed after the suggestion effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53 is executed corresponding to the cut-in effect that is the second timing. At this time, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the second timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 11-21 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM61 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 11-21 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM62 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 11-21 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM63 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM63, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display image 87AKC2 like the effect execution example 87AKM61 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The mode changes to blue display. At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. In the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 after executing the suggestion effect by displaying, the display image 87AKC3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM62 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The mode changes to green. At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM63 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The aspect changes to red display. The player's movement is promoted after a part or all of the cut-in effect, the suggestion effect, and the change effect corresponding to the second timing are executed, or after the reach effect progresses without executing these effects. The promotion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-21 (B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM71 in which a promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF1 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 11-21 (B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM72 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF2 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 11-21 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM73 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. After the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the small V-con display by the display image 87AKF1 such as the effect execution example 87AKM71, and the effect execution example 87AKM72. The promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the medium V-con display by the display image 87AKF2, and the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the large V-con display by the display image 87AKF3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM73. There are cases. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, the feature units 87AK to 89AK correspond to the feature unit 87AK to 89AK, such as the promotion effect determination example 87AK51 for the feature unit 87AK, the promotion effect determination example 88AK01 for the feature unit 88AK, and the promotion effect determination example 89AK01 for the feature unit 89AK. The display image 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined in proportion. With the execution of the promotion effect, the effective detection period is set to effectively detect the movement of the player. During the effective detection period, it is possible to detect an operation in which the player tilts the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, such as a pulling operation on the V controller. Based on the result of detecting the movement of the player during the effective detection period, the movement effect can be executed.

FIG. 11-22 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM81 when the operation effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being “missing”. In this case, for example, the fixed decorative symbol having a reach loss such as the effect execution example 87AKM91 shown in FIG. 11-22 (B1) is stopped and displayed, so that the display result of the variable display is derived and the process ends.

FIG. 11-22 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM82 when the operation effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display corresponding to the “big hit”. In this case, for example, the final decoration symbol of the jackpot combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM92 shown in FIG. 11-22 (B2) is stopped and displayed, so that the display result of the variable display is derived and ends.

In this way, the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player includes whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode, whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing, the final display image of the active display, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode. It is possible to execute different effects in different proportions according to other effects and display states. Further, depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit", and the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit game state can be different. Further, the suggestion effect, the change effect, and the cut-in effect can be executed without detecting the movement of the player. It is possible to execute the promotion effect at a different ratio according to the presence / absence of execution of the effect that can be executed without detecting the movement of the player, the effect mode, and the timing. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by the production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of. For example, in a configuration such as 88AK01 for determining the promotion effect related to the feature portion 88AK and 89AK01 for determining the promotion effect for the feature portion 89AK, the effect mode of the promotion effect can be determined regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. , The cut-in effect does not have to be executed.

It suffices that the promotion effect can be executed with different proportions of the effect mode depending on the presence / absence of execution, the effect mode, the timing, or a combination of a part or all of them in an arbitrary effect different from the promotion effect. For example, when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to the predetermined mode may be different depending on the presence / absence of the execution, the effect mode, and the timing. The variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" can execute the re-variable display once or a plurality of times after temporarily stopping the variable display after the variable display is started and then executing the variable display again. When the variable display is temporarily stopped, it may be in a predetermined temporary stop mode such as a pseudo-continuous chance eye. The pseudo-ream chance eye may include a combination of a plurality of types of temporary stop symbols according to the combination of decorative symbols. In this case, for example, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect may be different depending on the pseudo-continuous chances displayed as a temporary stop.

When the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" is executed, it is possible to execute the promotion effect and the action effect a plurality of times before and after the execution of the revariable display and after each revariable display is executed. It may be. In this case, among the plurality of promotion effects, the second promotion effect executed after the first promotion effect is the presence / absence of execution in the first promotion effect, the effect mode, the timing, or a part or all of them. Depending on the combination, the ratio of the effect mode may be different and the execution may be performed.

Along with the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, or instead of the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, it may be possible to execute the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display. In this case, the hold information related to the variable display is stored as the hold data including the random value for determining the display result, and in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and the second hold display area 87AKB2, the first hold display based on the hold information is stored. And the second hold display is executed. Then, before the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold information, the hold change effect of changing the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display at a different rate depending on whether or not the hold information is specific information is performed. It may be feasible. In such a configuration in which the hold change effect can be executed, the promotion effect may be executed at different ratios of the effect modes depending on whether or not the hold change effect is executed, the effect mode, and the timing.

The production modes such as suggestion production, change production, cut-in production, and promotion production are not limited to those in which the production modes differ depending on the display of different display images for some or all of the production modes, and various production devices are used. Any of the production modes may be different. For example, together with the display of the display image, or instead of the display of the display image, the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode in the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED, and the operation mode in the effect movable member. Or, depending on the combination of a part or all of them, the effect may be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10"). The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not they are controlled to these advantageous states. ..

As an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, it may be controlled to a KT (small hit time) state in which the probability that the variable display result becomes a "small hit" is high. For example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the KT state may be controlled at a predetermined ratio (including 100%). A gaming state that is not in the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT state. Further, the period controlled by the KT state may be referred to as a KT period, and the period not controlled by the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT period.

In the non-KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a very long time (for example, about 30 minutes). On the other hand, in the KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, in the KT state, when the second start winning is continuously generated due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is the non-KT state. It will be much better than at. Corresponding to the variable display using the first special figure and the second special figure, the rate at which the variable display result is determined as "small hit" is higher than the rate at which the variable display result is determined as "big hit". ing. For example, the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit" at a rate of 99/100 (99%), and the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a rate of 1/100 (1%). If the variable display result using the first special figure is "small hit", it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the large winning opening because the period during which the large winning opening is opened is short. Therefore, the game ball, which is a prize ball, is not paid out. In the KT state, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is improved, so that the frequency at which the variable display result using the second special figure becomes a "small hit" is also improved, and the small hit game state. It becomes easier to open the big prize opening. In the KT state, when the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area (right-handed), the frequency with which the big winning opening is opened is improved as compared with the non-KT state, which is advantageous for the player. Become. The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the KT state is controlled.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 87AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the above, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, an operation effect executing means such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process, and an effect that can execute a predetermined effect while executing the variable display, for example, step 87AKS049 of the variable display effect process. The specific display means includes a predetermined effect executing means such as a control CPU 120, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a plurality of displays such as display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed by any one of the modes, and the promotion effect executing means includes, for example, a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, a V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the display image, and the predetermined effect execution means includes, for example, a predetermined mode such as a message of "super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3. A predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. For example, as in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect in FIG. 11-12, the display mode of the specific display Depending on the situation, the predetermined effect is executed at a different rate according to the predetermined mode. For example, as in the case of determining the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in FIG. 11-13 87AK51, the predetermined effect is executed at a different rate depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect. The promotion effect is executed according to a special mode, and is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, for example, as in the case of determining the promotion effect 87AK51 according to the variable display result in FIG. 11-13. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by the production and improve the game interest.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. You may. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect, such as during the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect, the display mode of the specific display is different depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. It may be possible to change. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 10-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 10-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A in FIG. 10-6, is provided. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 88AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the above, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, the operation effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process step 87AKS053 and the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display can be executed, for example, the variable display effect process step 87AKS045 is executed. The specific display means is provided with a change effect execution means such as a CPU 120 for effect control, and the specific display means is red using, for example, the display image 87AKC4 from a period before the execution of the operation effect, such as the effect execution examples 87AKM01 to 87AKM73. The specific display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes including the specific mode such as the display, for example, the display color corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, and the promotion effect executing means uses, for example, the display image 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3, including a special mode such as the large V-con display, and the change effect execution means is For example, the change effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings, such as the feasible timing of the change effect in FIG. 11-9 (B3), and corresponds to the final display image in FIG. 11-14, for example. As in the decision example 88AK01 of the promotion effect, the promotion effect is executed in a special mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display, and for example, as in the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect according to the change effect in FIGS. 11-14. In addition, the selection ratio of the timing at which the change effect is executed differs depending on whether the promotion effect is executed in the special mode or not, and for example, the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIGS. 11-14. Promotion production as in the decision example 88AK01 It is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by the production and improve the game interest.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. You may. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, at the time of the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3), the change effect may be executed by the change effect execution means in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, when the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the change effect can be executed at different ratios depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. It may be. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute the change effect by the change effect execution means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 10-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 10-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A in FIG. 10-6, is provided. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 89AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, it is possible to execute an operation effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process and a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes, for example, the variable display effect process. The specific display means includes a suggestion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS043, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a display according to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes such as colors, and the promotion effect executing means includes, for example, a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display, and the suggestion effect execution means is, for example, a plurality of effect modes such as the suggestion mode according to the displayed images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. The suggestion effect can be executed by any of the above, and for example, as in the determination example 87AK32 of the suggestion effect in FIG. 11-11 (B), the specific display is displayed in a specific mode at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Displayed, for example, as in the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect according to the suggestion effect in FIGS. 11-15, any of the plurality of effect modes is displayed at different ratios depending on whether or not the promotion effect is executed by a special mode. The suggestion effect is executed, and is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, for example, as in the case of determining the promotion effect 89AK01 according to the variable display result in FIGS. 11-15. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. You may. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means, such as during the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect, the display mode of the specific display is different depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. It may be possible to change. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 10-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 10-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A in FIG. 10-6, is provided. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by directing and improve the interest of the game.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting whether or not it is controlled in the advantageous state, and
An image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect is provided.
The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the specific effect including at least the first specific effect and the second specific effect.
The image display means
As the specific image, at least, the first specific image can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image can be displayed during the execution of the second specific effect.
It is possible to display the specific image according to the normal aspect and the specific image according to a special aspect suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal aspect.
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state.
The image display means
When displaying the specific image according to the special aspect, the specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element.
When displaying the specific image according to the normal aspect, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element different from the first special effect element.
During the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific image can be displayed in different modes depending on the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state, and the first display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image. The first specific image can be displayed by adding a special effect element.
further,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Specific display means that can display specific display corresponding to variable display,
A promotion effect execution means that can execute a promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player,
An operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means,
It is provided with a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect while the variable display is being executed.
The specific display means can display the specific display by any one of a plurality of display modes including the specific mode.
The promotion effect execution means can execute the promotion effect by any one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of effect modes including the predetermined mode.
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined mode at different rates.
Depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect, the promotion effect is executed by the special mode at different rates.
Depending on the production mode of the promotion effect, the advantageous state is controlled at different ratios.
A game machine characterized by that.